JP2018196795A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of uniformly guiding game balls to different target positions in a game area.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a distribution device 1000 for receiving game balls flowing down a game area, and alternately distributing the received game balls to a first position (first start pocket 63a) and a second position (second start pocket 63b). More specifically, the game balls can be uniformly guided to different target positions in the game area by setting the first position and the second position as the target positions. The distribution device 1000 is operated by weight of the received game balls, thus executing operation for alternately distributing the game balls to the first position and the second position by a mechanical configuration, and eliminating the need for power and control for the operation. As a result, manufacturing costs can be reduced by reducing the number of components and control costs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided in the game area, lottery of the game is lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies the lottery result is executed on the display device Is done.

  In this configuration, a plurality of start openings are provided, and depending on the entry of the game balls into the respective start openings, whether or not the game is individually drawn by lottery, and dynamically displaying special symbols corresponding to the respective start openings, There are known ones that notify the lottery result. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters the first start port, a dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, and when a game ball enters the second start port, the second special symbol moves. A gaming machine on which a target display is executed is disclosed.

JP 2005-319221 A

  Thus, the player may use different positions in the game area as target positions (in the above example, the first start port and the second start port). However, it is difficult to guide the game balls equally (for example, to enter the first start port and the second start port) with respect to different target positions in the game area. For example, there is a problem in that the guidance is biased toward the first start port only).

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can evenly guide game balls to different target positions in a game area.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a gaming area, in which a gaming ball flows down, receives the flowing gaming ball, and receives the weight of the received gaming ball. The distribution member is provided with a distribution member that alternately distributes the game balls to the first position and the second position, and the distribution member includes a ball entrance that receives game balls flowing down the game area. A main body portion having a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion for receiving a game ball that has entered the entrance, and pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. A guide portion disposed in the main body portion, and a moving body that is guided and moved by the guide portion, and receives a game ball that has entered the entrance through the first receiving portion of the main body portion. And the first angular position where the first receiving portion is lower than the second receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and at the position where the game ball received from the entrance can be received. 2 receiving portions are arranged, and when the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the second receiving portion is lower than the first receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball When the main body rotates to the second angular position, the game ball received by the second receiving portion is discharged to the second position, and the game ball received from the entrance is received. The first receiving portion is disposed at a possible position, and at the first angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the first receiving portion, and the movable body is moved toward the first receiving portion. In the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion, and the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion. It is moved to.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the movement The body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the moving body is formed by annularly forming an end material made of an elastic material.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in which the moving body winds the end material, and the end portions are overlapped.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game machine includes the sorting member that receives the game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the position and the second position as the target position, it is possible to guide the game ball equally to different target positions in the game area.

  In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that is guided and moved by the guide unit are provided, and at the first angular position, the guide unit is inclined downward toward the first receiving unit side to move the moving body. Is moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion side, and the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. It is possible to maintain the main body portion in a posture (first angular position or second angular position) that should be originally used by utilizing the change in the gravity center position accompanying the.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. In addition, since the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted, a mechanism for moving the moving body according to the rotation direction of the main body portion can be achieved with a simple structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost, to enable stable operation, and to improve the reliability.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the second aspect, the moving body is formed by annularly forming an end material made of an elastic material. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of assembling steps. That is, when the moving body is mounted on the guide portion, a part of the moving body can be opened by elastic deformation, and the rod-shaped guide portion can be inserted into the annular moving body through the opening.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the third aspect, since the moving body is overlapped with each other, the part of the moving body is opened correspondingly. The amount of elastic deformation required for this is increased. Therefore, it can suppress that the mobile body with which the guide part was mounted | worn falls off. In addition, since the moving body is formed by winding a material, the manufacturing can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the sorting device schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first start opening, and (b) FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus schematically illustrated to explain the operation of distributing to two start ports. It is drawing for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (a) is the figure which showed the area | region division setting and effective line setting of the display screen typically, (b) is an actual figure. It is the figure which illustrated before and after rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in a display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of a distribution apparatus, (b) is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow VIIb direction view of Fig.7 (a). (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow VIIIb direction view of Fig.8 (a), (c) is the arrow VIIIc of Fig.8 (a). It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member in the direction view. (A) is a front view of the front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the direction of arrow IXb in FIG. 9 (a), and (c) is IXc− in FIG. 9 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front member in an IXc line. (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow Xb direction view of Fig.10 (a). It is sectional drawing of the facing wall member in the XI-XI line of FIG.9 (c). It is the plane expanded view which expanded and illustrated the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member in the arrow XII direction view of Fig.10 (a). (A) is a top view of a disk member, (b) is a front view of the disk member in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13 (a), and (c) is a front view of FIG. 13 (b). It is a bottom view of the disk member in the arrow XIIIc direction view. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. It is sectional drawing of the front member in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow XXb direction view of Fig.20 (a). (A) is a side view of a braking member, (b) is a top view of the braking member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIb in FIG. 21 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of a distribution device, (a) is the state before the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball, (b) is the state after the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball. , Respectively. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a sorting apparatus, (b) is a side view of a sorting apparatus. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXVb direction view of Fig.25 (a). (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the arrow XXVIb direction view of Fig.26 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 27 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXVIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of a weight member, (b) is a side view of the weight member in the arrow XXVIIIb direction view of Fig.28 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVb direction view of Fig.34 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVc direction view of 34 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVa-XXXVa line | wire of FIG.34 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVb-XXXVb line | wire of Fig.34 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXXIXb direction view of Fig.39 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 40 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XLc direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XLIa-XLIa line | wire of FIG.40 (b), (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 2nd angle position from a 1st angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 2nd angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 1st angle position from a 2nd angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 1st angle position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (c) is a 2nd angle position. It is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 18, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 63a, the second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A sorting apparatus 1000 is provided at the lower center of the game area. In the sorting apparatus 1000, a normal electric accessory 64 is provided at the top. In a normal state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 stands upward while the facing blades 64a and 64b face each other at a predetermined interval (an interval in which a game ball can enter approximately one ball (the diameter of the game ball is approximately 11 mm)). Arranged in a state. In a normal state (a state in which the blades 64a and 64b stand up), the route through which the game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000 is only a route that passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. The player first fires the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64.

  When a game ball enters the distribution device 630, the entered game ball is alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution apparatus 1000 will be described.

  FIG. 4 (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically shown for explaining the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the ball game balls to the second start port 63b.

  As shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the sorting device 1000 has a disc member 1300 that is rotatably mounted therein, and an outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 includes The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are recessed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), when the left game unit 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 depends on the weight of the game ball (that is, the weight of the game ball is equivalent to the disc). The center of gravity of the member 1300 is decentered to one side (right side in FIG. 4 (a)) with respect to the rotation center), while the disc member 1300 stores the game ball in the left receiving portion 1310L, (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction). When the left receiving portion 1310L reaches downward by the rotation of the disc member 1300, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L and the left guide passage 1110L 1 It is guided to the start port 63a.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the sorting apparatus 1000 receives the game ball that has entered next to the game ball shown in FIG. 4A by the right receiving portion 1310R. That is, in the sorting apparatus 1000, the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed 180 degrees out of phase with the left receiving portion 1310L, and when the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned below, the right receiving portion 1310R is positioned above and It is comprised so that the game ball which carried out the ball can be received alternately.

  In this case, when the right receiving portion 1310R receives the next game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 uses the weight of the game ball in the same manner as when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball. 1300 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction) while storing the game ball in the right receiving portion 1310R, and the right receiving portion 1310R reaches downward. The game ball stored in the right receiving portion 1310R is guided to the second start port 63b by being discharged into the right guide passage 1110R.

  As described above, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a and the right receiving portion 1310R moves upward. The right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has been placed and then entered. When the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and the left receiving portion 1310L is disposed upward. Next, the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered.

  Therefore, the sorting apparatus 1000 can evenly distribute the game balls to be entered into the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to be awarded, and as a result, the first start port 63a is caused by winning. It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second starting port 63b.

  Returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is activated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64, which is normally maintained in the upright state, stand up substantially vertically. It moves substantially in a V shape (inverted C shape) and guides the game balls by the blades 64a and 64b, so that the game balls can easily enter the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation display is not executed among the balls won at the first starting port 63a, the second starting port 63b, and the normal symbol starting port 67. This is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning at the first start port 63a elapses (in the present embodiment, the center segment of the seven segments blinks). After that, the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  In addition, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the rough fluctuation pattern time information described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) also falls under this category.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, whether or not a big hit is determined (big hit lottery), and the determination of the big hit type Do. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R normal jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the type of jackpot (in this embodiment, for example, “9” for 15R regular jackpot, “7” for 15R probability variation jackpot, “3” for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. After the jackpot, a game with a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability is set. That is. “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, which will be described later, is set. “2R probability variation jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of two rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability is set.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third symbol (the first symbol) in synchronism with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with a winning (starting award) to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8 inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, so that one of the third symbols is displayed in the left display area Dm1. The three symbol sequences of left, middle and right showing the first special symbol are displayed (see FIG. 5A). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, the second special symbol which is one of the third symbols is also displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying before and after rearrangement of the reserved symbol display on the actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying a holding symbol (the number of the first lottery game and the second lottery game on hold) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured so as to be divided into a left display area Dm1 and a right display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning to the first starting port 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning to the second starting port 63b is variably displayed.

  In the left display area Dm1, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the main symbol numbers are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the main symbol numbers appear in ascending order. On the other hand, the second special symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

  Further, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1 in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight small area reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of three special symbols (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display area Dm, respectively in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. The

  In the present embodiment, winnings to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b are each suspended up to four times. If a game ball wins at the first start opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) in the lower display area Ds. ) In the display area in which no reserved symbol is displayed, “○”, which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed in the lowest-numbered reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side). .

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, as in the case where the first start opening 63a wins, the reserved symbol “●” below the second lottery game is displayed. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. When a game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000, the game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b in order (that is, alternately). Whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed when the first start symbol 63a is won in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and there is no hold in the first lottery game. Regardless, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1, and then stopped. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 63b, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable display.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 at the same time. Therefore, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed by distributing the game balls to be alternately awarded to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 1000. it can. In the first lottery game and the second lottery game, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the jackpot game is executed, so that the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game. It is possible to increase the number of times and increase the chance that the player can win a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding lottery games are supported. Of course, it is also possible to provide each start port and to simultaneously display each lottery result in a variable manner.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  A horizontally-long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game jackpot in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is set so that after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop pattern is obtained. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the corresponding display area (the left display area Dm1 or the right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display apparatus 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined according to the determined jackpot type. For example, if it is a 15R normal jackpot, it can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is winning based on winning in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, The opening / closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (not shown) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number. Counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, hour / hour counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First jackpot flag 203o, second jackpot flag 203p, first variation stop flag 203q, second variation stop flag 203r, first variation time storage area 203s, second variation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. Having at least a memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 63a up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second start opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are used for counters when a start winning is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the buffer is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 63a during the timer interruption process, the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and the first reserved ball storage area 203a. Are stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and corresponding to each. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start port 63a or the second detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the start port 63b, the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 is up to four times each. It is a counter for counting. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is counted in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 63b. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the first variation start process or the second variation start process, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data. At the same time, the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). Based on this, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 88) performed on the first symbol display device 37 ( It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. As an initial value, zero is set by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing a normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol start port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process, the MPU 201 acquires the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 from the counter buffer, It is stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is turned on and stored (stored) in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. Yes. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing from the holding area where the data is vacant in the order of passing to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize). Is done.

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or first This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is in a variable display. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time reduction count is set, the normal symbol random table for high probability is set in the normal symbol random table 202c until the time reduction count is set to zero. In addition, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 have a longer opening time than in the normal gaming state (in this embodiment, 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the random number table for the normal symbol for the low probability of the winning random number counter 202c is set and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the release time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are opened.

  The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 15R probability variable jackpot game is executed, a flag that is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game has ended It is. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating the big hit (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the big hit game, depending on the big hit type, If it is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, it is set to ON.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the first start port 63a. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the second start port 63b. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a win while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process, the first special symbol variation display is set to OFF when the temporary display is performed.

  The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a win while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process, it is set to OFF when the temporary display process of the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol starts to be varied, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variation time storage area 203t counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and obtains time measurement data from the RTC at the time of the variation start. The configuration may also be such that timekeeping data is acquired and the fluctuation time is measured at any time thereafter. In addition, it is naturally possible to have a configuration in which the variation time for variation display is stored in advance and the value is subtracted as needed.

  The rearrangement hold storage area 203u is stored in each of the hold areas 1 to 4 stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process or the second prefetch process. This is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on data is stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a first variation start flag 223c1, a second variation start flag 223c2, 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, slave first variation stop flag 223e, slave second variation stop flag 223f, slave first variation restart flag 223g, slave second variation restart flag 223h, slave first A variable time storage area 223i, a secondary second variable time storage area 223j, a secondary rearranged storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is analyzed by the command determination process. Then, processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  Similarly to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 is the second special symbol held by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The sub first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first change restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the change display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control device 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the setting is turned off.

  The second change restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the change display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of resuming the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the first variable time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the fluctuation time of the actual fluctuation display is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the second variation time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the actual change time of the variable display is stored.

  In the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, data similar to the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is received from the main control device 110 based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control is performed. This is a storage area that is stored based on a winning command output to the device 113.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is read from the backup area, and each corresponding hold area in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is changing. Stored in the data storage area.

  In the start-up process, as in the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process, all winning commands are generated based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203u from which the backed-up data is read and stored. By outputting to the lamp controller 113, data synchronized with the same rearrangement storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k.

  In addition, in the start-up process, a configuration in which data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is synchronized even when returning from a power failure by transmitting a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores each data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k as backup data in the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Anyway, of course.

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is activated when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is turned on). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, a detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b).

  FIG. 7A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 1000, and FIG. 7B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 1000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the sorting apparatus 1000 is disposed on the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8) and the front side of the substrate member 1100 (the front side in FIG. 7). A front member 1200 (see FIGS. 9 to 12) and a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 1100 and the front member 1200 (internal space). Then, the game balls that have entered the ball are alternately distributed to two positions (first start port 63a and second start port 63b in the present embodiment) of the first position and the second position (see FIG. 4).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 1100, the front member 1200, and the disk member 1300 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 8A is a front view of the substrate member 1100, FIG. 8B is a side view of the substrate member 1100 in the direction of arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member 1100 in the arrow VIIIc direction view of Fig.8 (a). In FIG. 8A, the front member 1200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 1200 with respect to the substrate member 1100.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, the board member 1100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 1100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four positions in the central portion of the substrate member 1100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A), and the front side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A front side of the paper). ) And the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed.

  Two guide paths (a left guide path 1110L and a right guide path 1110R) are disposed below the center of the substrate member 1100. The left guide passage 1110L and the right guide passage 1110R receive the game balls discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the disc member 1300, and receive the received game balls in the first start port. 63a and a passage for guiding to the second starting port 63b (see FIG. 4), and openings (left opening 1111L and right opening 1111R) serving as entrances for game balls are formed to open upward on one end side. The opening serving as the outlet of the game ball is formed in a state where it is communicated with the left communication hole 1120L and the right communication hole 1120R on the other end side.

  The left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 8C) of the board member 1100 with respect to the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R. That is, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are juxtaposed along the front-rear direction of the board member 1100 (the vertical direction in FIG. 8A), whereby the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100. In the state, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are respectively communicated with the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 is inserted into the left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L via the left exit port 1222L of the front member 1200 and the disc member 1300. The game balls discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R are respectively introduced into the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R through the right discharge port 1222R of the front member 1200 (see FIGS. 14 to 18).

  A first start port 63a is connected to the left communication hole 1120L of the board member 1100, and a second start port 63b is connected to the right communication hole 1120R (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the left guide passage 1110L guides the game ball introduced from the left opening 1111L to the left communication hole 1120L and causes the first start port 63a to win. On the other hand, the right guide passage 1110R guides the game ball introduced from the right opening 1111R to the right communication hole 1120R and wins the second start port 63b.

  Next, the entire configuration of the front member 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9A is a front view of the front member 1200, FIG. 9B is a side view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb in FIG. 9A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the front member 1200 in the IXc-IXc line | wire of Fig.9 (a). FIG. 10A is a rear view of the front member 1200, and FIG. 10B is a top view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Xb in FIG. 10A.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the front member 1200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and a cylindrical facing wall member 1220 disposed on the back side (front side in FIG. 10) of the front plate 1210. And a shaft member 1230 disposed concentrically on the inner peripheral side of the facing wall member 1220, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The facing wall member 1220 is a portion in which a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) is rotatably mounted, and the inner diameter dimension thereof is the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the disk member 1300. Set to

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed such that the opening on one end side in the axial direction (right side in FIG. 9C) is closed by the front plate member 1210 and the opening on the other end side in the axial direction (left side in FIG. 9C) is opened. Is done. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 1100 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). That is, the assembling of the sorting device 1000 is performed by inserting the disc member 1300 from the open side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 1200 and fastening and fixing the substrate member 1100 to thereby attach the disc member 1300 to the sorting device 1000. The interior can be rotated and cannot be removed. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed with a ball inlet 1221, a left ball outlet 1222 </ b> L and a right ball outlet 1222 </ b> R, a left groove 1223 </ b> L and a right groove 1223 </ b> R, a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225.

  The entrance 1221 is an opening through which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and is formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the uppermost portion of the facing wall member 1220. In addition, the entrance 1221 is the center of the facing wall member 1220 in the axial direction (FIG. 9 (c) left and right direction) (that is, both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the rotating member 1300). A game ball that is disposed at a position where the movement trajectory overlaps and is entered can be received (guided) by either the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R are for introducing the game balls conveyed by the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 into the left guiding passage 1110L and the right guiding passage 1110R of the board member 1100. And is drilled along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the lowermost portion of the facing wall member 1220 (that is, a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance 1221).

  The left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are spaced apart from each other in the axial direction of the facing wall member 1220 (FIG. 9 (c) left and right direction), and the left receiving portion 1310L when the disk member 1300 is rotated and They are arranged on the movement trajectory on the exit side (the inclined side surface 1312 side, see FIG. 13) of the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left groove 1223 </ b> L and the right groove 1223 </ b> R are concave grooves having an arcuate cross section that are recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and extend along the circumferential direction of the facing wall member 1220. When the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is conveyed toward the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R as the disc member 1300 rotates, one of the game balls The portion can be received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (see, for example, FIG. 15).

  The curvature radii of the inner peripheral surfaces of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R (the arc shape in the cross section perpendicular to the extending direction) are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the curvature radius of the game ball. Therefore, when the disc member 1300 is rotated in a state where the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R, the game ball rolls or slides on the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R.

  The guide inclined portion 1224 is a concave portion whose upper surface side is opened and the ball entrance 1221 is opened on the bottom surface, and the inner wall of the concave portion is formed as four inclined surfaces inclined downward toward the ball entrance 1221. (See FIG. 10B). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down into the guide inclined portion 1224 can be guided to the entrance port 1221 and surely entered.

  Since the inner wall of the guide inclined portion 1224 is made higher (larger) than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball can be held inside (in the recess space). In other words, when a game ball cannot be introduced from the entrance hole 1221 to the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion is rotated along with the rotation of the disc member 1300. The game ball can be held inside the guide inclined portion 1224 until the portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221. When the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221 along with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the held game ball is passed through the entrance 1221. It can be promptly introduced into the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The tightened hole 1225 is a screw hole opened on the end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 10) of the facing wall member 1220, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 1100b (see FIG. 8) of the substrate member 1100. In other words, the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100 by fastening the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 1100 b from the back side of the board member 1100 into the fastening hole 1225 of the facing wall member 1220.

  A facing side magnet 1226 is embedded in the outer peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. The facing magnet 1226 is a magnet for applying a magnetic force (attracting force) to the game ball conveyed toward the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R, and extends in the extending direction of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R. A plurality (three in the present embodiment) are arranged along the line.

  On the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, a shaft portion 1230 is erected vertically from the back surface of the front plate member 1210. The shaft portion 1230 is concentrically disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and is used as a shaft that pivotally supports the disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a detailed configuration of the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R, the left groove 1223L, and the right groove 1223R of the front member 1200 will be described.

  11 is a cross-sectional view of the facing wall member 1220 along the line XI-XI in FIG. 9C, and FIG. 12 is a plan view of the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. FIG.

  Since the left outlet 1222L has the same configuration as the right outlet 1222R and the left groove 1223L has the same structure as the right groove 1223R, only the right outlet 1222R and the right groove 1223R will be described here, and the left outlet 1222L. The description of the left groove 1223L is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the right vent hole 1222R is a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 11) to the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 11) of the facing wall member 1220. Formed as. In other words, the right ball outlet 1222R is a hole that extends in an inclined direction toward the rotation direction of the disc member 1300 (the direction away from the right groove 1223R in FIG. 11). It is formed. Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disk member 1300 smoothly enters the right discharge port 1222R of the facing wall member 1220, and without entering the game ball. It can be made to pass to an exit (refer FIG.16 (b)).

  The right discharge port 1222R is an opening edge on the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, and the position of the opening edge on the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R (left side in FIG. 11) is the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R. Rather than the center of the facing wall member 1220 (ie, the side closer to the disk member 1300, the upper side in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball reaches the right drainage port 1222R (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) while accepting (inserting) a part thereof in the right groove 1223R, the outer peripheral surface of the game ball is It can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the right outlet port 1222R (the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R, the left side in FIG. 11) (see FIG. 16B). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped.

  The right groove 1223R has a terminal end (lower end in FIG. 12) connected to the right ball outlet 1222R, and a starting end (upper end in FIG. 12) is not connected to the ball inlet 1221. That is, the start end (upper end in FIG. 12) of the right groove 1223R is located at a position advanced by about 80 degrees from the entrance 1221. In the phase range of about 80 degrees from the entrance hole 1221, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310 R is not substantially in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (FIGS. 14B and 15A). This is because the recess in the right groove 1223R is wasted. Thereby, the strength reduction of the facing wall member 1220 due to unnecessary recesses can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved. On the other hand, by making the starting end of the right groove 1223R a little (about 10 degrees) ahead of the position where the phase is advanced 90 degrees from the entrance 1221R, the game ball is surely introduced into the right groove 1223R. In addition, the effect of the right groove 1223R (the rolling resistance or the sliding resistance acting on the game ball) can be maximized.

  In the right groove 1223R, the recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 is increased (deeper) toward the right ball outlet 1222R. In this case, as described above, in the right groove 1223R, the radius of curvature of the inner peripheral surface is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball.

  Therefore, when the game ball rolls or slides in the right groove 1223R with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance that acts on the game ball from the right groove 1223R is transferred to the right ball outlet 1222R. The closer it is, the larger it can be. In addition, the amount that the game ball can be received in the right groove 1223R (the amount that fits in) can be gradually increased as it approaches the right discharge hole 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the inertial force in the direction of entering the right ball outlet 1222R can be increased. Can be held in a game ball.

  On the bottom surface side of the right groove 1223R, facing magnets 1226 are arranged in a line along the extending direction of the right groove 1223R. That is, the facing-side magnet 1226 is disposed at a position corresponding to a movement trajectory in which the game ball moves as the disc member 1300 rotates. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed on the side closer to the right exit port 1222R (lower side in FIG. 12) than the entrance port 1221 of the facing wall member 1220. In the present embodiment, it is disposed within a range in which the phase is retracted by 15 degrees from the opening edge (right side in FIG. 11) of the right discharge port 1222R (the central angle is 15 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the right groove 1223, the magnetic force of the facing-side magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. Can act. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right discharge port 1222R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is used as a target on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 acts, so that it is not necessary to dispose a magnet on the disc member 1300. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced. However, a magnet may be provided on the disc member 1300 in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the facing magnet 1226.

  A plurality (three in the present embodiment) of facing magnets 1226 are disposed, and the more the facing magnets 1226 that are closer to the right discharge port 1222R, the more the game ball (that is, the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R). ) Is separated from the facing wall member 1220 in the radial direction. Therefore, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 can be increased as the game ball approaches the right exit port 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the effect of applying a magnetic force from the facing magnet 1226 to the game ball can be gradually increased, so that the rotational speed of the disk member 1300 can be smoothly reduced.

  Next, the disk member 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a top view of the disk member 1300, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the disk member 1300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A. These are the bottom views of the disc member 1300 in the arrow XIIIc direction view of FIG.13 (b). In FIG. 13B, the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are schematically illustrated by broken lines, while the push plate 1320 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the disk member 1300 is a member for transporting a game ball entered from the entrance 1221 of the facing wall member 1220 to the left exit 1222L or the right exit 1222R (FIG. 9). To FIG. 12), and is formed in a circular disk shape having a predetermined thickness (FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. 13 (c) vertical dimension) as viewed in the axial direction.

  In the following, the surface on one end side in the axial direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13B, the front side on the paper surface) is referred to as a front surface F, and the surface opposite to the front surface F is referred to as a back surface B. In the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 has a front surface F facing the front plate member 1210 (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200 and a back surface B facing the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8). Thus, it is installed between the board member 1100 and the front member 1200.

  The disc member 1300 includes a left receiving portion 1310L and a right receiving portion 1310R that are recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, a push plate 1320 that is installed in the opening portions of the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, and a front member. And a one-way clutch 1330 serving as a bearing portion supported by a shaft portion 1230 of 1200 (see FIGS. 9 and 10).

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R receive the game balls that have entered the entrance 1221, store the received game balls, and discharge them to the left exit 1222L and the right exit 1222R, respectively. The concave portions are rectangular in front view, and are arranged 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R include an inclined bottom surface 1311 and an inclined side surface 1312 that continues to the inclined bottom surface 1311. The inclined bottom surface 1311 is a flat surface that forms the bottom surface of the recess, and a game ball is dropped from the entrance 1221 to one end side (the opposite side to the inclined side surface 1312) of the inclined bottom surface 1311.

  The inclined bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward toward the front side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300. That is, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, the recessed depth from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is deeper toward the inclined side surface 1312 side (the distance from the axis of the disk member 1300 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 is It is shortened toward the inclined side surface 1312 side). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the entrance 1221 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 rolls on the inclined bottom surface 1311 toward the inclined side surface 1312 (see FIG. 14). As a result, as will be described later, the position of the center of gravity of the disc member 1300 as a whole is decentered from the axis by the weight of the game ball, and the disc member 1300 is rotated (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

  The inclined side surface 1312 is a flat surface that forms the side surface of the recess, and the game ball stored in the recess is rolled on the inclined side surface 1312 toward the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (FIG. 15A). reference). The inclined side surface 1312 has an angle of 90 degrees or more with the inclined bottom surface 1311 and is erected from the other end side (the front side in the rotational direction of the disk member 1300) that becomes the descending inclined end of the inclined bottom surface 1311. The

  Here, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is the thickness direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13A and FIG. 13 (c) direction) while the left receiving portion 1310L is located in the center, the inclined side surface 1312 is positioned on the front surface F side of the disk member 1300, and the right receiving portion 1310R has the inclined side surface 1312 on the back surface of the disk member 1300. Located on the B side.

  That is, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) enters the ball when the disk member 1300 is rotated in both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R. It is formed so as to be able to pass through a position (facing position) corresponding to the mouth 1221. Therefore, the game ball dropped from the entrance 1221 can be received and stored in the recess.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member 1300 is rotated, the inclined side surface 1312 of the left receiving portion 1310L has a position corresponding to the left groove 1223L and the left outlet port 1222L (facing position), and the inclined side surface of the right receiving portion 1310R. Reference numeral 1312 is formed so as to be able to pass through positions (facing positions) corresponding to the right groove 1223R and the right ball outlet 1222R when the rotating member 1300 is rotated. Therefore, the stored game balls can be discharged to the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R have a recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (a rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312). The dimension is a depth dimension that is at least larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, in the initial stage of receiving a game ball from the entrance 1221, the rotation of the disc member 1300 is suppressed by preventing the game ball bounced off the inclined bottom surface 1311 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. Can proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the dimension of the recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is a depth dimension smaller than 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when two or more game balls are successively entered from the entrance 1221, the second and subsequent game balls are inserted into the entrance 1221 (guide slope) in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotating member 1300. Part 1224).

  The pushing plate 1320 is a plate-like member that pushes the game ball against the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R and pushes it into the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The disk member 1300 is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw. In addition, a storage groove deeper than the thickness dimension of the pressing plate 1320 is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed in the storage groove. Therefore, the push plate 1320 and the head of the fastening screw are not projected from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300.

  Here, since the pushing plate 1320 repeatedly receives a large reaction force when pushing the game ball into the ball outlet, the fastening screw may be broken. In this case, since the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, the reaction force received when the pushing plate 1320 pushes the game ball into the ball outlet is applied to the side surface of the housing groove (the pushing plate on the side surface of the housing groove). 1320 can be supported), and the load applied to the fastening screw can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, breakage of the fastening screw can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed to the disc member 1300 with a fastening screw. However, the fastening with the fastening screw may be omitted. That is, the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, and the opening of the housing groove is closed by the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, so that the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 and the facing wall member 1220 If the gap between the inner peripheral surface is set to be smaller than the thickness of the pushing plate 1320, the pushing plate 1320 can be arranged so that the game ball can be pushed in and cannot fall off. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the assembly process can be simplified by the amount that the fastening screw can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost.

  The one-way clutch 1330 is a part for regulating the rotation direction of the disk member 1300, and when viewed from the front (front F view) of the disk member 1300 shown in FIG. While turning in the right direction is allowed, turning in the opposite direction (FIG. 13B counterclockwise (left rotation)) is restricted.

  That is, the disk member 1300 rotates in the direction in which the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving part 1310L and the right receiving part 1310R is inclined downward (that is, in the direction in which the disk member 1300 should rotate depending on the weight of the game ball). Rotation) is allowed, and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  Here, for example, immediately after the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (before the rolling of the game ball falling on the inclined bottom surface 1311 is started, FIG. When a vibration is input to the sorting apparatus 1000 due to a disturbance such as a player hitting the glass unit 16 in a)), the disc member 1300 is opposite to the direction in which the disk member 1300 should originally rotate. There is a risk of turning in the direction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch 1330, even if it is affected by disturbances such as vibrations, it is in a direction opposite to the direction in which it should originally rotate. It is possible to avoid the rotation of the disk member 1300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 18, the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 1000 will be described. 14, FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are schematic partial sectional views of the sorting apparatus 1000 illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the left receiving portion 1310L from the left outlet 1222L. These are the partial cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the distribution apparatus 1000 which illustrate the transition of the operation | movement which drains the game ball received by the right receiving part 1310R from the right discharge port 1222R.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), when a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the game ball is received by the left receiving portion 1310L, The sphere falls from the entrance 1221 to one end side (left side in FIG. 14A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) is directed downward toward the other end side (inclined side surface 1312 side) by the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 14B). Thus, since the bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward and the game ball rolls along the downward inclination direction, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the entire disc member 1300 including the game ball can be increased accordingly. it can. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly.

  In addition, for example, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may not be started while the game ball is rolling toward the inclined side surface 1312 due to resistance such as biting of a foreign object. In addition, the game ball rolling on the bottom surface 1311 can be made to collide with the inclined side surface 1312, and an impact force can be applied to the disc member 1300 by the collision of the game ball with the inclined side surface 1312. Therefore, it is possible to provide a trigger (for example, removal of foreign matter by impact force) for the disk member 1300 to start the rotation operation. In particular, since the direction in which the impact force acts coincides with the direction in which the disc member 1300 should originally rotate, it is possible to effectively provide a trigger for the disc member 1300 to start the rotation operation.

  Here, the game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221 in an unstable state (for example, a falling state where the falling direction is not constant and the side wall repeatedly collides), and the entrance For example, when the game ball collides with the pushing plate 1320 and then collides with the side surface opposite to the inclined side surface 1312 (the left side surface in FIG. 14A), the impact force at the time of the collision causes the left Depending on the weight of the game ball stored in the receiving portion 1310L, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may start in a direction opposite to the original direction to be rotated (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 1230 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) via the one-way clutch 1330, so that the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L is inclined downward. Only the rotation in the direction (that is, the original direction to be rotated depending on the weight of the game ball) is allowed, and the rotation in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A) can be restricted. it can.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14B, the inclined side surface 1312 has an inclination (ascending inclination) that rises with increasing distance from the bottom surface 1311. When the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started, the disk As the member 1300 rotates, the tilt angle of the rising slope is gradually reduced, and after reaching the horizontal level, the slope is lowered (falling slope) as it moves away from the bottom surface 1311. Therefore, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination toward the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220).

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the game ball reaches the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by rolling on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination. In this case, the left groove 1223L provided in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 extends along the movement locus of the left receiving portion 1310L (inclined side surface 1312), so that the disk member 1300 rotates. In this case, a state where a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 is received in the left groove 1223L can be formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), 15 (b) and 16 (a), when the rotation of the disk member 1300 is further advanced, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the inclined side surface 1312 is further increased. Thus, the game ball is moved toward the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by its own weight and the centrifugal force that acts in accordance with the rotation of the disk member 1300. As a result, the disc member 1300 is rotated while maintaining a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L.

  Thus, when the disc member 1300 rotates, the disc member 1300 can be connected to the facing wall member 1220 (left groove 1223L) via the game ball. Therefore, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300 using the resistance when the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L. As a result, the disk member 1300 moves in the rotation direction. It can suppress having an excessive inertia force (rotation speed). Therefore, after that, when the game ball is discharged to the left outlet 1222L (see FIG. 16B), the ball can be reliably discharged.

  A push plate 1320 is installed in the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L. The push plate 1320 rotates the disc member 1300 in a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223. In this case, the disc member 1300 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball behind the game ball. Therefore, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball can be transmitted to the disk member 1300 via the pushing plate 1320, and as a result, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300.

  As described above, if a state in which a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, a state protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L) can be formed (the protruding amount) ), The game ball is brought close to the left ball exit 1222L, and can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. Therefore, the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). It can be done reliably.

  Since the recess depth of the left groove 1223L increases (deeply) toward the left outlet 1222L, the resistance of the game ball due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is reduced. As it approaches the left vent hole 1222L (that is, the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds), it can be gradually increased. Therefore, the inertia force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In addition, since the amount of a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L can be gradually increased in the left groove 1223L (that is, the amount by which the game ball protrudes from the left receiving portion 1310L), the disc member 1300 can be increased. With this rotation, the game ball can be moved outward in the radial direction (that is, the direction accepted by the left groove 1223L). Due to this outward movement in the radial direction, the game ball can have an inertial force in the direction of entering the left ball exit 1222L, so that the game ball can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the mouth 1222L (see FIG. 16B).

  Here, the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L after the disc member 1300 is rotated by a predetermined angle (see FIGS. 12 and 15A). As a result, the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the disk member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14) is the circle. Where there is no momentum in the rotation of the plate member 1300, resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is not generated, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started and advanced smoothly and quickly. be able to. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds (the middle stage shown in FIG. 15A and the latter stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B), the inertial force of the disk member 1300 is obtained. As the momentum gradually increases and the momentum increases, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed by utilizing the resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L.

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16A, a facing magnet 1226 is disposed in the vicinity of the terminal end of the left groove 1223L. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed along the extending direction of the left groove 1223L (that is, the movement trajectory in which the game ball accommodated in the left receiving portion 1222L moves as the disc member 1300 rotates). When the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L as the disc member 1300 rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. As a result, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can act as a rotational resistance (braking force) on the disc member 1300 via the game ball, and the disc member 1300 can be decelerated. As a result, it is ensured that the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). Can be done.

  Further, by providing the facing magnet 1226 in the vicinity of the terminal end of the left groove 1223L in this way, it is possible to effectively brake the disk member 1300 using magnetic force (apply rotation resistance). That is, as described above, in the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 and the disc member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14), the rotation has momentum. However, at that stage, no magnetic force (a force that attracts the game ball) is generated, and the rotating operation of the disc member 1300 can be started and advanced smoothly and quickly. On the other hand, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 increases to the maximum at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 progresses (particularly, the later stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B). When the momentum increases, the inertial force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be effectively suppressed by using magnetic force (force to attract the game ball).

  In this case, since the plurality of facing-side magnets 1226 are arranged along the left groove 1223L (that is, along the circumferential direction of the disk member 1300), when the disk member 1300 rotates, The rotation resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member 1300 by using the magnetic forces of the plurality of facing magnets 1226, respectively. That is, when a turning resistance is suddenly applied to the disc member 1300, the disc member 1300 is suddenly braked, and the turning operation of the disc member 1300 becomes unstable. The reception by the unit 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the ball discharge of the game ball to the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B) are inhibited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member 1300 as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated and the rotation operation of the disk member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R and to discharge the game ball to the left exit 1222L.

  Further, the closer the plurality of facing magnets 1226 are to the left ball exit port 1222L, the smaller the distance from the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L to the outer side in the radial direction of the disk member 1300, that is, the left ball exit port 1222L. Since the closer to the left, the closer to the game ball that rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 is applied to the left ball exit 1222L. The closer it is, the larger it can be. That is, the rotational resistance applied to the disk member 1300 can be gradually increased, and the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated without sudden braking. Therefore, similarly to the above-described case, the rotation operation of the disc member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R and the left exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the left receiving part 1310L of the disc member 1300 reaches the left ball outlet 1222L of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball stored in the left receiving part 1310L By entering the mouth 1222L and passing through the left ball outlet 1222L, the ball is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the pushing plate 1320 provided on the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L is formed so as to be able to contact the game ball from the rear in the rotational direction of the disc member 1300. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged to the left ball outlet 1222L, the pushing plate 1320 contacts the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disc member 1300, thereby pushing the game ball into the left ball outlet 1222L ( Push in).

  In this case, the position of the opening edge on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is closer to the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 than the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L. Arranged. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L), while the left receiving portion 1310L is left When reaching the ball outlet 1222L, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L (the side facing the terminal end of the left groove 1223L, the left side in FIG. 16B). Thereby, not only can the game ball be reliably discharged to the left discharge port 1222L, but also the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 of the left groove 1223L is the maximum depth dimension at the end communicating with the left outlet 1222L, but in the present embodiment, this maximum depth The depth dimension is approximately ¼ of the diameter of the game ball. The maximum recess depth is preferably ¼ or more of the diameter of the game ball, and more preferably ３ or more. This is because the game ball can be reliably brought into contact with the opening edge of the left outlet 1222L and can be prevented from being bounced back into the left receiving portion 1310L.

  Further, the left vent hole 1222L is formed as a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 16B) of the facing wall member 1220 toward the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 16B). Is done. That is, in the left vent hole 1222L, the inner peripheral surface on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member 1300 in the rotational direction. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 can smoothly enter the left ball discharge port 1222L, and the exit (see FIG. ).

  Note that the left vent hole 122L is disposed to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the opening of the left receiving portion 1310L) and is disposed at the lowermost portion in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L to the left discharge port 1222L, the ball can be discharged using the centrifugal force associated with the rotation of the disk member 1300, and the game ball is moved downward (gravity to the game ball). In the direction of the action). That is, when a ball is thrown, the game ball's own weight (gravity) acts in a direction that causes the game ball to enter the left ball outlet 1222L, so that it is difficult to bite the game ball and the ball can be discharged reliably. .

  Here, the facing wall member 1220 is disposed at a position where the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the inlet 1221 (see FIGS. 9 to 12), Since the plate member 1300 is disposed at a position where the right receiving portion 1310R is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received. The timing received by one of the portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R can be matched with the timing at which the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R discharges the game ball to the left ball outlet 1222L or the right ball outlet 1222R.

  That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, in a state where the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned in the same phase as the left exit port 1222L, as shown in FIG. 17A, the right receiving portion 1310R is 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is discharged to the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R. The next game ball can be received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R at the time or after the ball is discharged, and the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is left exit port 1222L Alternatively, it is not necessary to receive the next game ball in the middle of carrying toward the right ball outlet 1222R (that is, in a state where the disk member 1300 is rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  As described above, when the game ball is brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped (see FIG. 16B), the disk member 1300 is stopped. The right receiving portion 1310R faces the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) (see FIG. 17A). Therefore, in this case, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221, the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball is received from the entrance 1221 to the right. It is dropped to one end side (left side in FIG. 17A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the portion 1310R.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) faces the other end side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) on the bottom surface 1311 due to the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L and the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R are inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member 1300, the left receiving portion 1310L has received the same inclination direction. A rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and a rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310R. Can be in the same direction. That is, the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where the disc member 1300 rotates alternately in one direction and the other direction according to the receiving portion (left receiving portion 1310L or right receiving portion 1310R) that receives the gaming ball, the gaming ball is positioned at two positions. The operation of distributing to (the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R) can be stably executed.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the operation after the game ball rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along its descending inclination and reaches the inner peripheral surface (right groove 1223R) of the facing wall member 1220 ( The action / effect is the same as that when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball (see FIGS. 14 to 16), and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the sorting apparatus 1000, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, since the sorting apparatus 1000 has a structure using a disk member 1300 formed in a disk shape, a planar arrangement is possible. Therefore, the distribution device 1000 is disposed even in a region where the distance between the game board 13 (base plate 60) and the glass unit 16 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is relatively narrow. Can do.

  Next, a distribution device 2000 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped by the game ball being brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R (FIG. 16 ( b), the rotation of the disc member 1300 of the second embodiment is stopped by being braked by the braking member 2240. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19, the front member 2200 according to the second embodiment has recesses 2230 that are recessed spaces provided in two locations, and the brake member 2240 can operate in the recessed spaces of the respective storage portions 2230. Respectively. Here, with reference to FIG.20 and FIG.21, the detailed structure of the accommodating part 2230 and the braking member 2240 is demonstrated.

  20A is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200, and FIG. 20B is a plan view of the front member 2200 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20A. As shown in FIG. 20, the storage portion 2230 includes an operation recess 2231 and a shaft support recess 2232 connected to the operation recess 2231.

  The operation recess 2231 is a recess for accommodating the protruding piece 2342 and the facing piece 2243 of the braking member 2240 so as to be operable (swingable), and the left groove 1223L and the left groove 1223L sandwiching the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R. Recessed at two locations on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on the opposite side of the right groove 1223R. The operation recess 2231 has one surface side (upper side in FIG. 20 (a)) opened to the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and one end side (right side in FIG. 20 (a)) is the left or right outlet port. It communicates with 1222R.

  The shaft support recess 2232 is a recess for housing (supporting) the shaft portion 2241 of the braking member 2240 so that the shaft portion 2241 can be operated (turned). It is recessed with a recess depth shallower than 2231. The shaft support recess 2232 is opened on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on one side (upper side in FIG. 20A).

  FIG. 21A is a side view of the braking member 2240, and FIG. 21B is a top view of the braking member 2240 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the braking member 2240 includes a columnar shaft portion 2241, a protruding piece 2242 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241, and a direction opposite to the extending direction of the protruding piece 2242. A facing piece 2243 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241 and an elastic member 2244 disposed at the extending tip of the facing piece 2243 are formed integrally from a resin material.

  The shaft portion 2241 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the shaft-supporting concave portion 2232 of the storage portion 2230. The protruding piece 2242 is a portion that protrudes to the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R through the opening on one end side of the operation recess 2231. By the game ball passing through the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R Pushed down.

  The facing piece 2243 is a part whose front end is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and is pushed up toward the disk member 1300 around the shaft portion 2241 when the protruding piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball. It is done. The elastic member 2244 is made of a rubber-like elastic body, and is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 when the facing piece 2243 is pushed up.

  The protruding piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the side. The protruding direction of the projecting piece 2242 is a direction in which the protruding piece 2242 is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft portion 2241 (that is, in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, see FIG. 22A).

  The total length of the facing piece 2243 is larger (longer) than the total length of the protruding piece 2242, and the width dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 21B) is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Is done. That is, the facing piece 2243 is heavier than the protruding piece 2242 even if the weight excluding the elastic member 2244 is used. Therefore, the barycentric position of the braking member 2240 is located closer to the facing piece 2243 than the shaft portion 2241.

  The facing piece 2243 is formed to be bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the side, and is easily elastically deformed in the direction of increasing the bending angle. In other words, as described above, the facing piece 2243 is spaced away from or in the direction of approaching the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 even when the width dimension is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Elastic deformation in the direction (vertical direction in FIG. 22B) is ensured.

  With reference to FIG. 22, the braking operation of the disk member 1300 by the braking member 2240 will be described. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 2000. FIG. 22A shows a state before the protruding piece 2242 of the braking member 2240 is pushed down by the game ball, and FIG. 22B shows the brake member by the game ball. The state after the projecting piece 2242 of 2240 is pushed down is shown respectively.

  The brake member 2240 disposed on the left ball outlet 1222L side and the storage portion 2230 that stores the brake member 2240, and the brake member 2240 disposed on the right ball outlet 1222R side and the housing that stores the brake member 2240. Since the parts 2230 have the same configuration, only the configuration on the right exit port 1222R side will be described here, and the description on the configuration on the left exit port 1222L side will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the braking member 2240, in the non-operating state (initial state), the protruding piece 2242 protrudes into the right outlet port 1222R, and the facing piece 2243 is the disc member 1300. It is arrange | positioned facing the outer peripheral surface of this.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the game ball drained from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 passes through the right drain port 1310R of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball causes the braking member 2240. The projecting piece 2242 is pushed down in the passing direction, and the braking member 2240 is rotated around the shaft portion 2241 to push up the facing piece 2243. Thereby, the extended tip of the pushed-up facing piece 2243 can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 via the elastic member 2244, and the disc member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) can be reliably received by the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 14A).

  As described above, the braking member 2240 is operated using the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, and the operation of bringing the facing piece 2243 into contact with the disk member 1300 can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Power (actuator) and control for operation can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, even when the game ball passes through the right ball outlet 1222R, the state in which the facing piece 2243 (elastic member 2244) of the braking member 2240 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is maintained. Subsequent rotation of the member 1300 is hindered. Therefore, after the game ball has passed, it is necessary to quickly return the braking member 2240 to the non-operating state (initial state). On the other hand, if power is used for the return operation, as described above, the braking operation is mechanically performed, so that control and sensors are unnecessary, and the significance of reducing the product cost is lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the gravity center position of the braking member 2240 is located on the facing piece 2243 side (left side in FIG. 22A) with respect to the shaft portion 2241 as described above. Therefore, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down and the facing piece 2243 is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when the braking member 2240 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 22 (b) clockwise) around the shaft portion 2241). ), The braking member 2240 is rotated in the other direction (FIG. 22 (b) counterclockwise) by utilizing its own weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft portion 2241). ) To the non-operating state (initial state) shown in FIG. Therefore, power for the return operation can be made unnecessary.

  Since the projecting piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 toward the extended distal end side (right side in FIG. 22 (a)), the projecting piece 2242 is discharged to the right discharge port 1222R. It is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball from being obstructed by the protruding piece 2242 and to smoothly push down the protruding piece 2242 by the passing game ball.

  The facing piece 2243 is provided with an elastic member 2244 at its extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), so that the frictional force with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is reduced. It is possible to ensure the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member 1300.

  In this manner, the use of the elastic member 2244 can reduce the product cost. That is, for example, a structure in which the disc member 1300 is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece 2243 to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is conceivable. In this embodiment, since it is not necessary to form uneven shapes on the disc member 1300 and the braking member 2240, the shape of the parts can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, the facing piece 2243 is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and an elastic member 2244 is disposed at the extending tip thereof, so that the facing piece 2243 is formed. When the extending tip (elastic member 2244) is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 130, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member 1300, the braking member 2240, and the like are caused by elastic deformation of the facing piece 2243 itself and It can be absorbed by elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244.

  Similarly, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, the variation in the pushed position and the direction in which the game ball passes is determined not only by the elastic deformation of the projecting piece 2242 but also by the facing piece. Since it can also be absorbed by the elastic deformation of 2243, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced back to the protruding piece 2242 and to pass it reliably.

  When the facing piece 2243 is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300, the abutment force between them (ie, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disc member 1300) is used as the protruding piece 2242. In addition to the elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244, the elastic deformation of the facing piece can be used gradually so that the rotational movement of the disk member 1300 can be prevented from changing suddenly.

  The assembling of the sorting apparatus 2000 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that a step of storing the braking member 2240 in the storage portion 2230 of the front member 2200 is added, and the opening side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 2200 The disc member 1300 is inserted and the substrate member 1100 is fastened and fixed.

  In other words, the storage portion 2230 is recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), and the opening of the concave space of the storage portion 2230 has an opening of the disk member 1300. The outer peripheral surfaces are confronted. Therefore, the opening of the recessed portion space of the storage portion 2230 can be closed by the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the braking member 2240 stored in the storage portion 2230 can be connected to the recessed space of the storage portion 2230 and the outer periphery of the disk member 1300. It can be operatively held between the surfaces. As a result, a member that holds the braking member 2240 (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as the disk member 1300, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for such holding. Can be reduced.

  Next, a distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the distribution device 3000 that distributes the game balls by rotating the disk member 1300 in one direction has been described. However, the distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment alternates in one direction and the other direction. Rotate to distribute game balls. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 3000 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 3000 will be described. The distribution device 3000 is provided with a support plate member 3300 therein. The support plate member 3300 is pivotally supported between a first angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 23A or a second angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 23A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23B, the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23 (b), the support plate member 3300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 23 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, and is alternately disposed at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 3300 is provided with a weight member 3400 so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture in which the center plate 3330 faces upward. That is, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When arranged at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the weight member 3400 is arranged on the descending inclination side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A (shown by a broken line in FIG. 23B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When the weight member 3400 is disposed at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the weight member 3400 is disposed on the descending inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23B (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 3000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  24A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 3000, and FIG. 24B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 3000. As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the sorting device 3000 is disposed on the substrate member 3100 (see FIG. 25) and the front side of the substrate member 3100 (the front side in FIG. 24). Front plate member 3200 (see FIG. 26), a support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 (internal space), and the support plate member A weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) to be attached to 3300, and the entered game ball is in two positions, a first position and a second position (in this embodiment, a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b). ) Alternately (see FIG. 23).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100, the front member 3200, the support plate member 3300, and the weight member 3400 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a front view of the substrate member 3100, and FIG. 25B is a side view of the substrate member 3100 as seen in the direction of the arrow XXVb in FIG. In FIG. 25A, the front member 3200 is schematically shown using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 3100.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the board member 3100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 3100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through these insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four central portions of the substrate member 3100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 3100 (FIG. 25A, the back side of the paper), and the fastening screw causes the front side of the board member 3100 (the front side of the paper side of FIG. 25A). ) And the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed.

  A shaft hole 3130 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the board member 3100, and an opening serving as an outlet for a game ball is provided below the center of the board member 3100. A left communication hole 3120L and a right communication hole 3120R are formed. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted through the shaft hole 3130.

  The left communication hole 3120L and the right communication hole 3120R are openings for allowing the game balls discharged from the support plate member 3300 to win the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b (see FIG. 23). In the assembled state in which the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed to the front member 3200, the front member 3200 is disposed at the downstream end of the guide passage (see FIG. 26) formed by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200.

  Next, the overall configuration of the front member 3200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26A is a rear view of the front member 3200, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the front member 3200 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the front member 3200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c that are erected on the back side of the front plate 1210 (the front side of FIG. 26 (a)). These are integrally formed from a resin material.

  A shaft hole 3230 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the front plate member 1210. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted into the shaft hole 3230. The wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c are members that surround the periphery of the support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) and form a guide path for game balls distributed by the support plate member 3300.

  In the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c, the opening on the front side (FIG. 26 (a), the back side of the paper) of the internal space surrounded by them is sealed by the front plate member 1210, and the back side (FIG. 26 (a) the front side of the paper). Side) opening is formed. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 3100 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

  That is, the assembling of the sorting device 3000 is performed by installing the support plate member 3300 from the opening on the back side of the internal space surrounded by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200, and setting the rotation shaft 3320 of the support plate member 3300. The substrate member 3100 is fastened and fixed while being inserted through the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, respectively. As a result, the support plate member 3300 can be installed inside the sorting device 3000 so as to be rotatable and not dropout. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The wall member 3220a is formed in an inverted U shape in a rear view, and the wall member 3220b is formed in a straight line in a rear view extending vertically on the inner side of the wall member 3220a. That is, the wall member 3220b is opposed to a linear part in back view extending in the vertical direction (FIG. 26 (a) vertical direction) of the wall member 3220a with a space through which one game ball can pass. Arranged.

  The upper ends of the straight portions of the wall member 3220b as viewed from the back are bent inwardly (in directions close to each other). The linear portion that is bent and extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 26A, left-right direction) abuts on the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R of the support plate member 3300, and rotates the support plate member 3300. It functions as a part that regulates the moving angle.

  The wall member 3220c is formed by connecting the lower ends of linear portions in back view extending in the vertical direction of the wall members 3220a and 3220b. As a result, the guide passage through which the game ball passes is defined, and the end of the guide passage is formed.

  In the wall member 3220a, a ball entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225 are formed. Since these are the same structures as each site | part 1221,1224,1225 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 3300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 3300, and FIG. 27 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 3300 in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 28 is a bottom view of the support plate member 3300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C, the support plate member 3300 includes a cylindrical central cylindrical portion 3310 and an axial rotation shaft 3320 protruding from both end surfaces of the central cylindrical portion 3310. A central plate 3330 extending upward from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (upper side in FIG. 27A), and left and right from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (left and right sides in FIG. 27A). Left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R extending toward the bottom, and guide portion 3350 disposed on the bottom surface side (the lower side in FIG. 27A) of left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R. These are integrally formed from a resin material. However, the rotation shaft 3320 is made of a metal material and is fitted into the central cylindrical portion 3310.

  The outer cylindrical dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 is made larger than the inner diameters of the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, and the length dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 27B) is determined by the distribution device 3000. The dimension is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the substrate member 3100 and the back surface of the front plate member 1220 of the front member 3200 in the assembled state. Therefore, in the assembled state of the sorting device 3000 in which the rotation shaft 3320 is inserted into the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, the support plate member 3300 cannot be removed and can be rotated between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 facing each other. Decorated.

  The central plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R are portions formed in a flat plate shape, and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R extend vertically with respect to the central plate 3330. A space between the central plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340 or a space between the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340 is a part that receives the game ball that has entered the sorting device 3000.

  The guide portion 3350 is a portion for guiding the weight member 3400 according to the inclined state of the support plate member 3300, and is formed in a bar shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, a linear portion extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 27 (a) left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and both ends of the linear portions are connected. And a portion connected to the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. The weight member 3400 is moved to the downward inclined side of the support plate member 3300 by sliding on a linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 (see FIG. 29).

  The linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction. Therefore, the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced, and sliding resistance can be suppressed. Therefore, the weight member 3400 can be reliably moved along the descending slope of the guide portion 3350 without stopping the weight member 3340 in the middle, and the weight member 3400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400 (FIG. 29). (See (a) or FIG. 29 (d)).

  Next, the overall configuration of the weight member 3400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a front view of the weight member 3400, and FIG. 28B is a side view of the weight member 3400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the weight member 3400 is a member that is attached to the guide portion 3350 of the support plate member 3300 and functions as a weight, and is an end material (made of a metal material). For example, it is formed in an annular shape by winding a piano wire. Therefore, since the opening can be formed in a part of the weight member 3400 by elastic deformation, the guide member 3350 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the weight member 3400 through the opening. Therefore, the mounting work can be facilitated and the number of assembly steps can be reduced.

  In addition, when the weight member 3400 is formed by winding a material with ends, the end portions are overlapped in a front view. That is, the end material has a length of 180 degrees or more along the circumferential direction. As described above, the weight member 3400 is formed by overlapping the end portions thereof, so that even if the weight of the weight member 3400 is increased, the weight member 3400 is separated from the guide portion 3350. It can suppress falling off.

  Further, the material of the weight member 3400 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the material. Therefore, since the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, the weight member 3400 can be reliably and rapidly moved as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the operation of distributing the game balls and the operation of the weight member 3400 by the distribution device 3000 will be described. FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are front views of the support plate member 3300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 3300 that receives an incoming game ball and discharges the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the support plate member 3300 is positioned such that the left receiving plate 3340L side is positioned downward and receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. At the first angle position, the left receiving plate 3340L is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise when the rotation shaft 3320 is the rotation center (FIG. 29). (B) Counterclockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  As shown in FIG. 29B and FIG. 29C, when the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, the weight of the game ball The support plate member 3300 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction) about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the game balls received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R are moved to the second start port 63b (FIG. 23 ( b), the support plate member 3300 is in a posture to receive the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. At the second angle position, the right receiving plate 3340R is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 with the rotation shaft 3320 as the center of rotation is viewed clockwise (FIG. 29 ( d) The clockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  When the next game ball is entered in the state where the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29D, the door receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In both cases, the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the opposite side to that described above, whereby the game ball is discharged to the second starting port 63a (see FIG. 23A).

  Thus, for example, when the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIGS. 29A and 29B), By turning the game ball from the first angle position to the second angle position using the weight of the game ball (FIGS. 29C and 29D), the game ball is moved to the second start port 63b. To throw a ball. At the same time, the support plate member 3300 is arranged in a posture (second angular position) where the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. Accordingly, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in the present embodiment, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  However, the center plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R receive the game balls, the direction in which the game balls drop, or the direction in which the game balls are discharged from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, etc. Depending on the state of the variation and the timing at which disturbances such as vibrations input from the outside to the sorting device 3000 are transmitted to the support plate member 3300, there are variations, for example, as shown in FIG. After the game ball is received at one angular position and the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d) and the game ball is discharged, it is maintained at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d). The support plate member 3300 to be returned may return to the first angular position shown in FIG. In this case, the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R in the same manner as the previous game ball, and the operations from FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (d) are repeated. The game balls are continuously discharged to the second start port 63b. For this reason, the game balls cannot be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in this embodiment, the second start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  On the other hand, the distribution device 3000 includes a guide unit 3350 and a weight member 3400 that is guided and moved by the guide unit 3350. For example, in the second angular position shown in FIG. Since the member 3400 is moved to the downward inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), the posture of the support plate member 3300 is supposed to be originally (FIG. 29 (d) using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400. ) Second angular position).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 3400 is positioned at the descending inclined end (the left receiving plate 3340L side) of the guide portion 3350, so that the left receiving plate The 3340L side is made heavy, and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C, the support plate member 3300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 rotates by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction), the guide portion 3350 is also rotated in the same direction, and the guide portion 3350 is lowered toward the right receiving plate 3340R. By being inclined, the weight member 3400 is moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion 3350.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 3400 reaches the descending inclined end of the guide portion 3350. As a result, the center of gravity position as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 3400 (the lower right receiving plate 3340R side is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d), the support plate member 3300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 29 (d)), and the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (a). Since it can suppress returning to 1 angular position, this support plate member 3300 can be maintained at a 2nd angular position.

  In the present embodiment, since the support plate member 3300 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 3400 is made of a metal material, a change in the center of gravity position due to the movement of the weight member 3400 can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to reliably exhibit the effect of maintaining the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, a support plate member 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the portion for guiding the weight member 3400 of the guide portion 3350 is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed in a curved shape in a circular arc when viewed from the front. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 30A is a front view of the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 30B is a front view of the support plate member 4300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 30B, for the purpose of comparison, the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment is illustrated using a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed to be curved in a front view arc shape concentric with the rotation shaft 3320, and the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. It is arranged. In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 4350 is circular in cross section similarly to the guide part 3350 in 3rd Embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b), according to the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, when the support plate member 4300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 320, the gradient on the ascending inclination side is increased. Can be great. That is, in the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment, the weight member 3400 that is slidably moved by the guide direction (that is, gravity (self-weight) of the weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) at the position P1 on the ascending inclination side is the guide part 3350. Is the extending direction of the linear portion of the guide portion 3350.

  On the other hand, in the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment, the guide direction of the weight member 3400 at the position P2 on the ascending slope side is the tangential direction of the guide portion 4350, so that the angle of the descending slope is increased (more Can be directed downward). Therefore, the movement of the weight member 3400, which is positioned on the rising inclination side (position P2) of the guide portion 4350 with the rotation of the support plate member 4300, is compared with the guide portion 3350 of the third embodiment. , It can be performed more reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the annular weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) slides on the rod-shaped guide portions 3350 and 4350, the friction resistance is large, and thus the weight that is positioned on the ascending slope side (positions P1 and P2). There is a possibility that the movement of the member 3400 may not start (that is, the static friction coefficient is larger than the dynamic friction coefficient), and the configuration in which the guide portion 4350 is curved in a circular arc when viewed from the front is particularly effective for such a configuration.

  Next, a support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 3rd Embodiment, although the part which guides the weight member 3400 of the guide part 3350 was formed in linear form from the start end to the terminal end, the weight member 3400 was added to the guide part 5350 of 5th Embodiment. A depression (depression 5350a) is formed in a part of the guided portion. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31A is a front view of the support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a front view of the support plate member 5300 arranged at the second angular position. FIG. 31B shows the support plate member 5300 in a state where the weight member 3400 is attached to the guide portion 5350.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 31A left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 31 (a)) of the linear portion to be provided, recessed portions 5350a that are recessed downward are formed.

  The hollow portion 5350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 31 (a)). In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 5350 is set to the same cross-sectional shape as a whole including the hollow part 5350a, and is circular in cross section like the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), since the recessed portions 5350a are formed at both ends of the guide portion 5350, the guide plate 5300 is rotated with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. When the weight member 3400 moves toward one end side (the right side in FIG. 31 (b)) along the downward inclination of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is moved to the recess portion 5350a. Can be fitted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from bouncing back to the rising slope side (left side in FIG. 31B).

  That is, like the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), when the entire portion that guides the weight member 3400 is formed in a straight line from the start end to the end, it follows the descending slope of the guide portion 3350. When the weight member 3400 is slid vigorously to the end and is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end (right end in FIG. 29 (d)), there is nothing that hinders the movement of the bounced weight member 3400. The member 3400 may be bounced back to the start end (left end in FIG. 29 (d)). In that case, with the movement of the weight member 3400, the support plate member 3300 is rotated in the opposite direction, and cannot be maintained in a desired posture (first angular position or second angular position). .

  On the other hand, in the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment, since the recessed portion 5350a is formed at the terminal end (right end in FIG. 31B) of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is formed along the descending inclination of the guide portion 5350. Even if it is slid swiftly to the end, the weight member 3400 is fitted into the recess 5350a and collides with the end (the right end in FIG. 31 (b)), so it is rebounded in the reverse direction at the end. However, the movement of the weight member 3400 in the rebound direction can be inhibited by the upward inclination of the recess 5350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 31 (b)), and the support plate member 5300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment will be described. In 3rd Embodiment, although the case where the weight member 3400 was formed from the raw material of a cross-section circular strip | line body was demonstrated, the weight members 6400 and 7400 of 6th Embodiment and 7th Embodiment are from plate-shaped material. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment is made of a metal material, and a circular plate shape in which a slit extending in the radial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is a member. According to this weight member 6400, since the material has a thickness in the axial direction, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are shifted in the axial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  FIG. 33A is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 33A, the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment is made of a metal material, and a cylindrical member in which a slit extending in the axial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is. According to this weight member 7400, since the material has a thickness in the radial direction, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are displaced in the radial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  According to the weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, for example, the weight member 6400 can be formed in one step by punching a shape including a slit by pressing from a flat plate material, A plurality of weight members 7400 can be formed by rolling a flat material by roll processing, creating a relatively long roll-shaped body, and cutting the roll-shaped body at predetermined lengths. Therefore, these weight members 7400 Manufacturing efficiency can be increased, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Thus, while the weight members 6400 and 7400 are easy to manufacture, the weight members 6400 and 7400 are made of a plate-shaped material, so that it is easy to secure the weight as the weight. Thus, by applying the weight to the support plate member 3300 or the like as a weight, the holding plate member 3300 or the like can be reliably maintained in a posture (first angle position or second angle position) that should be originally.

  Next, a support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In 3rd Embodiment, although the guide part 3350 was penetrated to the cyclic | annular weight member 3400 and the weight member 3400 was slid along the guide part 3350, the weight member 8400 of 8th Embodiment is as follows. Rolled along the guide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 34 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 8300 in the direction of the arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 (c) is a bottom view of the support plate member 8300 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVc in FIG. 34 (a). 35A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 8300 along the line XXXVa-XXXVa in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 35B is a support plate along the line XXXVb-XXXVb in FIG. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of member 8300.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment includes a box body 8350 for housing a weight member 8400 on the bottom side of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the box 8350. A lid body 8360 attached to the opening is disposed, and the weight member 8400 rolls along a path formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 (see FIG. 36).

  The box 8350 is a box-shaped body that is open on one side (the front side in FIG. 34 (a)), the ceiling surface is formed by the central cylindrical portion 3310, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R. The bottom surface is formed in parallel with the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (the left-right direction in FIG. 35A). The side walls (left and right side walls in FIG. 35 (a)) facing each other of the box 8350 are bulged outward in a semicircular cross section, and the bulged portion (meat) Fastened holes 8351 are respectively formed in the thick portions).

  The lid body 8360 is a plate-like body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an insertion hole for inserting the fastening screw 8370 is provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 34 (a) left-right direction). The fastening screw 8370 inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the fastening hole 8351 of the box body 8350, whereby the lid body 8360 is fastened and fixed to the box body 8350, and one side of the box body 8350 (FIG. 34 (a The opening on the front side) is closed by the lid 8360.

  The weight member 8400 is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material, and is housed in a passage formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the rotation shaft 3320. The length of the weight member 8400 in the axial direction is slightly smaller than the facing distance between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360 (the distance in the left-right direction in FIG. 35B). Accordingly, the weight of the weight member 8400 can be secured, and the posture of the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being disturbed in the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being bitten between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360.

  Next, the operation of the weight member 8400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (d) are front views of the support plate member 8300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 8300 that receives a game ball that has been entered and discharges the game ball. Note that the game ball distribution operation is the same as that in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 8400 has a descending inclined end (left receiving plate 3340L) of a passage (hereinafter referred to as “passage”) formed by the box 8350 and the lid 8360. The left support plate 3340L side is made heavy and the support plate member 8300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 36B and 36C, the support plate member 8300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 2369 (b)), the passage is also rotated in the same direction, and the passage is inclined downward toward the right receiving plate 3340R. Thus, the weight member 8400 is rolled along the downward slope of the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 36D, when the support plate member 8300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 8400 reaches the descending inclined end (one of the opposing side walls) of the passage. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 8400 (the right receiving plate 3340R side positioned below is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angle position shown in FIG. 36 (d), the support plate member 8300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 36 (d)), and the second angle position shown in FIG. Since it can suppress returning to 1 angle position, this support plate member 8300 can be maintained in a 2nd angle position.

In the present embodiment, a passage parallel to the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R is formed,
Since the weight member 8400 is formed as a cylindrical body capable of rolling the passage, when the passage is inclined downward with the rotation of the support plate member 8300, the weight is increased along the downward inclination of the passage. The member 8400 can be moved reliably and quickly.

  For example, in the structure in which the annular weight member 3400 moves by sliding the guide portion 3350 as in the case of the third embodiment, since the sliding resistance is large, the movement of the weight member 3400 is not started, or the guide portion The weight member 3400 that moves along the descending slope of 3350 may stop halfway, and the movement speed of the weight member 3400 may not be in time because the movement speed is slow.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the weight member 8400 is formed as a cylindrical body and is configured to roll the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end of the passage, The weight member 8400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 8300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 8400.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the box body 8350 is made of a resin material, the entire support plate member 8300 can be integrally formed, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, its weight can be secured, so that the change in the center of gravity position due to rolling can be increased.

  On the other hand, during the game ball sorting operation by the support plate member 8300 (see FIG. 36), the opposite side walls of the box 8350 (that is, one end side and the other end side of the passage where the weight member 8400 rolls, FIG. a) Since the weight member 8400 repeatedly collides with the left side and the right side, as described above, the box 8350 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, the box The side walls of the 8350 facing each other are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a fastening hole 8351 for fastening the fastening screw 8351 is formed on the side walls of the box 8350 facing each other, and a part of the side wall is partially formed along with the formation of the fastening hole 8351. It bulges outward (thickness). Therefore, a state in which the fastening screw 8370 made of a metal material is embedded in the opposite side walls of the box 8350 can be formed, and a part of the side wall can be partially thickened. The portion where 84000 collides can be reinforced to prevent the side wall from being damaged. In addition, the structure for fastening and fixing the box 8350 and the lid 8360 can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the weight member 84000 collides (the side wall of the box 8350). Since it is not necessary to provide the product, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a support plate member 9300 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the bottom surface of the passage in which the weight member 8400 rolls is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front end to the end, but the weight member 8400 is formed on the bottom surface of the passage in the ninth embodiment. A depression (depression 9350a) is formed in a part of the portion that guides the movement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 37A, the weight member 8400 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the bottom surface of the box 9350 in the ninth embodiment has a horizontal direction parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIG. 37 (a) horizontal direction). At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 37 (a)) of the linear portion extending to the bottom, recessed portions 9350a that are recessed downward are formed. The hollow portion 9350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 37 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), since the recessed portions 9350a are formed at both ends of the box body 9350, the support plate member 9300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as a rotation center. Even if the weight member 8400 rolls vigorously to the end along the descending inclination, the weight member 8400 is fitted into the recess 9350a while the end (see FIG. 37 (b) right end), even if it is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end, it is possible to inhibit the movement of the weight member 8400 in the bounce direction due to the rising inclination of the recess 9350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 8400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 37 (b)), and the support plate member 9300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, a sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position is changed by sliding the weight member 3400 along the guide portion 3350 has been described. In the tenth embodiment, either the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R is used. The position of the center of gravity is changed by hanging one side downward. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 38 (a) shows the operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 38, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 10000 will be described. The sorting device 10000 has a support plate member 10300 disposed therein. The support plate member 10300 is pivotally supported between a first angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 38A or a second angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 38A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B, the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38 (b), the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball and is alternately arranged at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 10300 is provided with a left weight member 10360L and a right weight member 10360R so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture facing right above. That is, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When placed at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the left weight member 10360L hangs down on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and maintains the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When arranged at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the right weight member 10360R is suspended downward (to the right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 10300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 10300 receives the next game ball to be entered at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38B (broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 10000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100 and the support plate member 10300 will be described in order. FIG. 39A is a front view of the substrate member 10100, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the substrate member 10100 in the direction of the arrow XXXIXb in FIG. In FIG. 39A, the front member 3200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 10100.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, the board member 10100 differs from the board member 3100 in the third embodiment only in that an upper protrusion 10141 and a lower protrusion 10142 are added. The configuration is the same. Therefore, only different configurations will be described.

  A pair of upper protrusions 10141 and a pair of lower protrusions 10142 protrude from the periphery of the shaft hole 3130 of the substrate member 10100. The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 are columnar protrusions used when the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and are released from the magnetic attachment (FIGS. 42 and 43). The pair of upper protrusions 10141 are equally disposed on the left and right sides at positions above the shaft hole 3130, and the pair of lower protrusions 10142 are equally disposed on the left and right positions at positions below the shaft hole 3130. The

  The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 located on the left side (left side in FIG. 39A) of the shaft hole 3130 are left-locked when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. The upper projection 10141 and the lower projection 10142 that are provided on the movement trajectory of the piece 10370L and are located to the right of the shaft hole 3130 (right side in FIG. 39A) have the support plate member 10300 that rotates the rotation shaft 3320. It protrudes on the movement trajectory of the left locking piece 10370L when rotated as the center. Therefore, when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320, the left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are locked to the upper protrusion 10141 or the lower protrusion 10142 (FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 10300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. 40 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 10300, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 10300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 42 is a bottom view of the support plate member 10300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLc in FIG. 41A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 10300 along the XLIa-XLIa line of FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B is a view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the first angular position. It is a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports a rotating shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the left receiving plate 3340L, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 10350. A left weight member 10360L and a left locking piece 10370L are fixed to the rotation shaft 10351. Similarly, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the right receiving plate 3340R, and the rotation shaft 10351 pivotally supported by the bearing 10350 includes The right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed.

  The left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are plate-like bodies made of a metal material (magnetic material) and are formed in the same shape. The left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are portions that are locked to the upper protrusion 1141 or the lower protrusion 1142 when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 2210. For example, as shown to Fig.41 (a), it arrange | positions by plane symmetry with the center board 3330 as a symmetry plane.

  Note that the left weight member 10360L and the left locking piece 10370L, and the right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed to the same rotation shaft 10351, respectively, and thus rotate in the same phase together with the rotation shafts 10351. Is moved (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  Magnets 10380 are disposed on the bottom surface of left receiving plate 3340L and the bottom surface of right receiving plate 3340R, respectively. Each of these magnets 10380 magnetizes the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R, thereby maintaining the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R ( 42 and 43).

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the left receiving plate 3340L is disposed at the first angular position below the right receiving plate 3340R, the support plate member 10300 is on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side). The left weight member 10360L located in the vertical direction is suspended vertically, while the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 can be rotated clockwise in FIG. 41 (b) with the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 being eccentric to the left receiving plate 3340L side with respect to the rotation shaft 3320 and the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Since it is suppressed, the first angular position shown in FIG. 41 (b) is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 41B (first angular position), when the next game ball is inserted, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. . As a result, the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 41B around the rotation shaft 3320 by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position (FIG. 38). (Refer to the state of the solid line in (b)).

  At this second angular position, the support plate member 10300 is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 with the left weight member 10360L suspended vertically at the first angular position, while being magnetized to the magnet 10380 at the first angular position. The right weight member 10360R is released from the magnetic attachment and is suspended vertically. Therefore, the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 is decentered toward the right receiving plate 3340R with respect to the rotation shaft 3320, and the rotation of the support plate member 10300 about the rotation shaft 3320 in the counterclockwise direction is suppressed. Therefore, the second angular position is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  In the present embodiment, the magnet 10380 is used to maintain the state in which the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3344R. Compared to the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, the structure can be simplified, and the close state can be maintained and the releasing operation can be performed reliably. Can be improved.

  Further, since the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material), the magnet 10380 may be only the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R. It is necessary to arrange a magnet in Therefore, the number of magnets can be reduced by half compared to the case where the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R are provided with magnets, respectively. Accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

  Furthermore, the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material, so that not only the number of magnets can be reduced, but also the weight as a weight can be increased. In addition, the amount of movement of the center of gravity associated with the rotation of the right weight member 10360R can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 10300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  42 and 43, when the support plate member 10300 is disposed from the first angle position to the second angle position (or vice versa) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, the left weight member The principle that the states of the 10360L and the right weight member 10360R (the suspended state and the magnetically attached state) are alternately switched will be described.

  FIG. 42A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position. FIGS. 42B and 42C are directed from the first angular position to the second angular position. FIG. 42D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the second angular position.

  On the other hand, FIG. 43A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position, and FIGS. 43B and 43C illustrate the first angular position from the second angular position. FIG. 43D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position.

  The principle that the state of the left weight member 10360L is alternately switched in the transition from the first angular position to the second angular position and the transition from the second angular position to the first angular position is that the right weight member 10360R Since the state is alternately switched and is the same as the principle, only the right weight member 10360R will be described, and the description of the left weight member 10360L will be omitted. 42 (b) to 42 (d), the upper protrusion 10141 is not shown, and in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (d), the lower protrusion 10142 is not shown.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 42A to 42D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the first angular position (FIG. 42A) to the second angular position (FIG. 42D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising inclination side, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R. Maintained. In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap between both the upper protrusion 1141 and the lower protrusion 1142.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) about the rotation shaft 3320, the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ2. The right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the lower protrusion 10142. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the lower protrusion 10142, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right locking piece 10370R is pushed upward relatively by the lower protrusion 10142 (in the direction close to the right receiving plate 3340R, the upper side of FIG. 42B), as shown in FIG. 42C. The weight member 10360R is rotated in the direction away from the right receiving plate 3340R (the lower side in FIG. 42B), and the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released as shown in FIG.

  Since the right weight member 10360R is heavier than the right locking piece 10370R, when the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released, the right weight member 10360R hangs vertically around the rotation shaft 10351 as the rotation center. When the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (c) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, and the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ4, the right receiving plate 3340R is disposed at the second angular position. .

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the descending slope side. In this case, the right locking piece 10370 </ b> R is disposed at a position having a gap with the lower protrusion 1142. Therefore, the weight of the right weight member 10360R can be efficiently applied to the right receiving plate 3340R.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 43A to 43D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the second angular position (FIG. 43A) to the first angular position (FIG. 43D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the downward slope side. From this state, the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclined direction (FIG. 43 (a) counterclockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center while the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically. The

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclination direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) about the rotation shaft 3320, and the upward inclination angle reaches an angle θ5. Then, the right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the upper protrusion 10141. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the upper protrusion 10141, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the upward tilt direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right engagement piece 10370R is pushed relatively downward (lower side in FIG. 43 (b)) by the upper protrusion 10141, so that the right weight member 10360R is moved to the right receiving plate as shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is rotated in the direction approaching 3340R (the upper side in FIG. 43 (c)) and is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  In the present embodiment, the right weight member 10360R can be brought close to the magnet 10380 by the right locking piece 10370R coming into contact with the upper protrusion 10141, so that the magnet 10380 can be securely attached to the magnet. Can be done. Therefore, since it is not necessary to increase the magnetic force of the magnet 10380 unnecessarily, the release of the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380 described above (see FIGS. 42B and 42C) can be ensured.

  In the right receiving plate 3340R, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is in close proximity to the right receiving plate 3340R with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center (FIG. 43 (c) counterclockwise). When the rising inclination angle reaches the angle θ1, it is arranged at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (d), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising slope side, the right weight member 10360R is maintained in the state of being close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380. . In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap with the upper protrusion 1141. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right locking piece 10370R from coming into contact with the upper protrusion 1141 due to the influence of disturbance or the like and inadvertently releasing the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R by the magnet 10380.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the support plate member 10300 includes the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 1036OR that are pivotably suspended by the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the left weight member 10360L. The left inclined piece 10370L and the right inclined piece 10370R connected to the right weight member 1036OR are provided, and when the support plate member 10300 is arranged up to the first angular position or the second angular position, it is arranged on the upward inclined side. The left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R, while the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR arranged on the descending slope side is a magnet. The magnetic attachment by 10380 is released, and the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3 It can be suspended vertically from the 40R. Thereby, the gravity center position of the support plate member 10300 can be moved, and the support plate member 10300 can be maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  For example, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380. At the same time, the left weight member 10360L located on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side) is suspended vertically, so that the position of the center of gravity as a whole is changed to the left receiving plate 3340L side (that is, located on the descending slope side). The left support plate 3340L side can be made heavier). As a result, it is possible to suppress the support plate member 10300 from rotating back in the reverse direction and back to the second angular position, and maintain the first angular position. The same applies to the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position.

  Next, the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the left weight member 10360L and the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the right weight member 10360R are individually provided. In the eleventh embodiment, 1 The magnet 10380 is configured to be used for both the magnetic attachment of the left weight member 10360L and the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  44 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 arranged at the first angular position, and FIG. c) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 disposed at the second angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with one magnet 10380 on the bottom surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310. Further, the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R are made larger in length than the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R in the tenth embodiment.

  That is, in the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R, the length dimension from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip (lower end in FIG. 44 (a)) is made larger than the linear distance from the rotation shaft 10351 to the magnet 10380. . Therefore, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the right weight member 11360R can be magnetized to the magnet 10380, while at the second angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (c). The left weight member 11360L can be magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, one magnet 1038 is also used as a magnet for magnetizing the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R and maintaining them in a state in proximity to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R. To do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. Further, by increasing the lengths of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R in this way, the amount of movement of the center of gravity position accompanying the displacement of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R can be further increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 11300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  A pachinko machine may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments. For example, it is exemplified that the pachinko machine is configured by combining the sorting apparatus 1000 in the first embodiment and the sorting apparatus 3000 in the third embodiment (that is, both are arranged on the game board 13). .

  In each said embodiment, the case where the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b are arrange | positioned in the distribution destination (1st position and 2nd position) of the game ball by each distribution apparatus 1000-10000 as an example. Although described, what is disposed at the first position and the second position is not limited to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, and may have any other configuration. That is, there is no limitation on the type of winning prize. Further, the components disposed at the first position and the second position do not need to have a structure in which a game ball such as a prize opening enters. For example, a nail or a windmill may be used. Also, nothing may be provided. In other words, the first position and the second position specify the position in the game area, and the configuration existing at the position is not limited.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the object on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 disposed on the facing wall member 1220 is applied is a game ball, but instead or in addition to this, Then, a magnet may be disposed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 may be applied to this magnet. The magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can be applied with higher accuracy according to the phase (rotation position) of the disk member.

  In the third to ninth embodiments, the case where the number of weight members 3400 to 8400 attached to the guide portions 3350 to 5350 or accommodated in the passages of the box bodies 8350 and 9350 is one has been described. The weight members 3400 to 8400 may be mounted or stored at the same time. By effectively using the space in the extending direction (sliding or rolling direction) of the guide portions 3350 to 5350 and the passage (that is, mounting or storing two or more in parallel along the extending direction) By doing so, it is possible to further secure the weight while reducing the size of the sorting apparatus.

  Although the case where the weight members 3400 to 7400 are configured as an open system has been described in the third to seventh embodiments, the weight members 3400 to 7400 may be configured as a closed system. In that case, the guide portions 3350 to 5350 may be separated from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the case has been described in which the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material). However, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L are made of a nonmagnetic material such as a resin material. Also good. In this case, magnets may be disposed on the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R in the direction of the magnetic poles that can be magnetically attached to the magnet 1380.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are shaped so that the center of gravity is located in the center in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. The case where the shape is a flat plate shape having a constant thickness dimension) has been described, but it is preferable that the center of gravity is decentered toward the tip side from the center in the length direction from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip. This is because the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the support plate members 10300 and 11300 accompanying the displacement of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R can be increased.

  As a method of decentering the center of gravity toward the distal end side, a method of increasing the thickness or / and width dimension of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R toward the distal end side, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L, and Examples thereof include a method of attaching an aluminum sheet or a lead sheet to the front end side of the right weight members 10360R and 11360R or fastening a metal screw.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine having a game area, in which a game ball flows down the game area, receives the game ball flowing down and operates with the weight of the received game ball to move the game ball to a first position and a second position. A gaming machine 1 including a sorting member that alternately distributes to a position.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game machine 1 includes a sorting member that receives a game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the position to the target position, it is possible to guide the game balls equally to different target positions in the game area.

  In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 1, the first start port and the second start port, each of which determines whether or not the game is successful by entering the ball, and the game balls distributed to the first position by the sorting member are guided to the first start port A gaming machine (2), comprising: a first guiding unit that performs the second guiding unit that guides the game balls distributed to the second position by the sorting member to the second starting port.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1, the first ball that guides the gaming balls alternately distributed to the first position and the second position by the sorting member to the first start port and the second start port, respectively. Since the guide portion and the second guide portion are provided, the game balls can be guided equally to the first start port and the second start port (different target positions).

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the first special symbol corresponding to the first start port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified and 2. When a game ball enters the starting port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the second special symbol corresponding to the second starting port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified.

  In this case, if a game ball enters the first start opening during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right to dynamically display the first special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is over the upper limit (for example, It is stored as a holding ball until 4). Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start port during dynamic display of the second special symbol, the right to dynamically display the second special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as a holding ball.

  However, it is difficult to uniformly enter the game balls at the first start port and the second start port, and the balls are likely to be biased only at one of the start ports. ) Is difficult to use. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit (the number of stored balls is stored up to the upper limit at both the first start port and the second start port), more than the upper limit number of game balls enter at one start port. Overflow is likely to occur. When an overflow occurs, the winning lottery and dynamic display for the overflowed entry are not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 2, the game balls flowing down the game area can be evenly entered into the first start port and the second start port by the sorting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the upper limit numbers of the holding balls set at the first start port and the second start port, respectively. In other words, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed and the player's disadvantage can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a disk-shaped disk member that is pivotally supported, and a facing wall member that is disposed to face the disk member. The facing wall member is disposed at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a position where the phase is different in the circumferential direction from the entrance, and the game at the first position. A first ball outlet for discharging a ball; and a second ball outlet for discharging the game ball at the second position while being disposed at a position that is different in phase in the circumferential direction from the ball inlet, The disc member receives a game ball that has entered the entrance port of the facing wall member, and the disc member is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, whereby the received game A first receiving portion for discharging the ball to the first position via the first ball outlet and a game ball that has entered the ball inlet of the facing wall member; And a second receiving portion for discharging the received game ball to the second position through the second discharge port by rotating the disk member with the weight of the received game ball. The gaming machine 3 is configured such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance of the facing wall member.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance of the facing wall member and the received game ball is received by the first receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member has a weight of the game ball. When the first receiving portion reaches the first ball outlet of the facing wall member, the game ball is discharged to the first position through the first ball outlet. In this case, since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance wall of the facing wall member, the balls are then entered into the entrance wall of the facing wall member. The received ball is received by the second receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and the second receiving portion reaches the second outlet of the facing wall member. Thus, the game ball is discharged to the second position through the second discharge port. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first position and the second position, and the distribution operation is executed using the weight of the game balls.

  In addition, since the distribution member is formed in a disk shape and can be arranged in a plane, even in a game area where the depth dimension (the interval between the game board and the plate glass) is relatively small, It is easy to secure a space for arranging the sorting members.

  In the gaming machine 3, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a receiving surface that receives a game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member is inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 3, the first receiving part and the second receiving part have a receiving surface that receives the game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member, Since it is inclined downward along the circumferential direction, when a game ball entering from the entrance is received by the receiving surface of the first receiving portion or the receiving surface of the second receiving portion, the game is played along the downward inclination of the receiving surface. The ball can roll along the circumferential direction of the disk member, and the position where the weight of the game ball acts on the disk member can be moved. Thereby, since the change of the gravity center position of the disc member due to the weight of the game ball can be increased, the disc member can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly. .

  In the gaming machine 4, a game is characterized in that the receiving surfaces of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same direction so as to be inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Machine 5.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 4, the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same downward direction along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Therefore, the disc member is rotated by the rotating direction when the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the first receiving portion and the weight of the game ball received by the second receiving portion. The rotation direction when rotating is the same direction. That is, the rotating direction of the disk member can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where a disc member rotates to one direction and another direction, the operation | movement which distributes a game ball to a 1st position and a 2nd position can be performed stably. In addition, when a mechanism for reducing or stopping the rotation speed of the disk member is provided, the number of the mechanisms disposed can be reduced and the structure can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via a one-way clutch, and is allowed to rotate in a direction in which the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined downward. A gaming machine 6 characterized in that the rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch, and the receiving surface of the first receiving part and the receiving surface of the second receiving part are inclined downward. Rotation (that is, rotation in the direction to be rotated by the weight of the game ball) is allowed and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted, so that it is affected by disturbances such as vibration However, it is possible to avoid the disk member from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it should rotate, and as a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of the operation of distributing the game balls to the first position and the second position.

  The one-way clutch is not limited as long as it only allows rotation in one direction and restricts rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch system include a sprag type and a cam type.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet in the facing wall member are inclined and extended toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. A gaming machine 7 to play.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first and second outlets of the facing wall member are inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disk member into the first discharge port or the second discharge port of the facing wall member.

  That is, since the distribution member has a structure in which the disc member is rotated, when the game ball moves from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first outlet or the second outlet, There is a possibility that the game ball may be caught between the receiving part or the second receiving part and the first outlet or the second outlet. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet are inclined toward the advancing direction of the disk member (that is, the game ball is the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). Therefore, the game balls pushed out from the first receiving part or the second receiving part can be smoothly received into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first outlet and the second outlet are different in phase by 180 degrees with respect to the entrance. The gaming machine 8, wherein the plate member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with the first receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is a position where the first and second outlets are 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance. And the disc member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the first receiving portion. The timing received by one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion can be matched with the timing at which the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion discharges the game ball to the first outlet or the second outlet. .

  That is, when one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet port or the second outlet port, the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the inlet port. Therefore, when the game ball received in one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet, or after discharging, the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part Thus, the next game ball can be received and the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is being transported toward the first outlet or the second outlet (that is, a circle) It is not necessary to receive the next game ball (with the plate member being rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first and second outlets are disposed. A gaming machine 9 which is arranged at the lowermost position.

  According to the gaming machine 9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first outlet Since the mouth and the second ball outlet are disposed at the lowermost position, the game ball can be discharged downward from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. That is, when the ball is discharged, the game ball's own weight acts in a direction to enter the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, so that the game ball is hardly bitten and can be discharged reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet have the same phase, and the first ball outlet with respect to the ball inlet And the second drainage port is disposed at a position where the phase is different by 90 degrees, and the disk member is configured such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are arranged around the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees. A gaming machine 10 that is alternately arranged in four directions.

  According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 3 to 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet arranged at the same phase are 90 degrees out of phase with the ball entrance. Since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are alternately disposed at four positions in the circumferential direction of the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees, the first entrance portion and the second reception portion are placed at the entrance. The timing at which one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the played game ball and the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The timing at which the game ball is discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port can be matched.

  That is, when one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet or the second outlet, the first receiver is disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to the first outlet. Since the other of the part and the second receiving part is in the same phase as the entrance, the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first exiting port or the second exiting port. The next receiving ball can be received by the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to one of the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Alternatively, while the game ball received on one side of the second receiving part is being carried toward the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet (that is, in a state where the disk member is rotated), the next game ball There is no need to receive. Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In addition, since the first outlet and the second outlet are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to the entrance, for example, the first receiver is compared with a configuration in which the phase is changed by 180 degrees. The rotation angle of the disk member required for discharging the game ball received at the head or the second receiving part to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be reduced, and as a result, the disk It is possible to reduce the influence of the inertial force accompanying the rotation of the member. Therefore, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion, and discharge the ball into the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the facing wall member is recessed in a surface facing the disc member, and the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion when the disc member rotates. And a first groove and a second groove that extend along the movement trajectory and communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and are stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the disk member is rotated in a state where a part of a ball is received in the first groove or the second groove.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the first groove and the second groove are recessed in the surface of the facing wall member facing the disk member, and the first groove and the second groove are The disk member extends along the movement trajectory of the first receiving part and the second receiving part when the disk member rotates, so that when the disk member rotates, the first receiving part or the second receiving part 2. A state in which a part of the game ball stored in the receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove can be formed. Therefore, when the disc member rotates, it is possible to form a state in which the disc member is connected to the facing wall member via the game ball, so that the game ball rolls in the first groove or the second groove. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the inertial force from becoming excessive by applying a rotational resistance to the disk member by utilizing the resistance when sliding. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In addition, since the first groove and the second groove communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is transferred to the first groove or the second groove. If the state received in the second groove (that is, the state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part) can be formed, the game ball is moved to the first outlet or the second outlet for the receiving (protrusion). Since the close-up state and the state where it is easy to enter the first or second exit port, the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first or second exit port.

  Further, the first groove and the second groove are communicated with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is the first groove or the second groove. The first receiving part or the second receiving part has reached the first outlet or the second outlet by being in an accepted state (that is, a state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part). In this case, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the edge located on the extension line of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In addition, although the terminal end of the first groove and the second groove communicates with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, the first groove and the second groove do not communicate with the ball inlet, and the start ends of the first groove and the second groove It is preferable that it is separated from the mouth by a predetermined rotation angle. According to this configuration, the initial stage in which the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, where there is no momentum in the rotation, It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotation of the disk member without generating resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotating operation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, so that rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove occurs. By utilizing the resistance caused by the movement, it is possible to suppress the inertial force of the disk member and to optimize the rotation operation.

  In the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet. The resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the first groove and the second groove can be increased as the first receiving part or the second receiving part approaches the first ball discharging port or the second ball discharging port. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized.

  Also, an amount that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove (that is, an amount protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). The game ball can be moved in the direction in which it is accepted (protruded) by gradually increasing the game ball, so that the game ball has an inertial force in the direction of entering the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Can do. As a result, the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be easily entered, and the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In the gaming machine 12, the first groove and the second groove have a maximum recessed depth greater than ½ of the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 12, the maximum recess depth of the first groove and the second groove is set to be larger than ½ of the diameter of the game ball. Since the portion received in the second groove (that is, the portion protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion) is made larger, the game ball can be brought closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, so that the game A state in which the ball can easily enter the first outlet or the second outlet can be formed, and the gaming ball can be more reliably discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at positions of opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. The gaming machine 14 is arranged closer to the disk member than the bottom surface of the two grooves.

  According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at the positions of the opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. Since the first groove and the second groove are disposed closer to the disc member than the bottom surfaces of the first groove and the second groove, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part is the first groove or the second groove. When the first receiving part or the second receiving part reaches the first outlet or the second outlet, the game ball is received by the player (that is, protruding from the first receiver or the second receiver). Can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the side facing the terminal end of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first groove or the second groove. When the disc member is pivoted in a state of being received, the push portion is provided so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotational direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 15 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine 15, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first. When the disk member is rotated in a state of being received in the first groove or the second groove, the pushing portion is positioned so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotation direction of the disk member. Since the pushing portion abuts the game ball that rolls or slides in the first groove or the second groove from the rear in the rotational direction of the disk member, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball is reduced. As a result, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed. Further, when the game ball is discharged to the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, the pushing portion comes into contact with the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disk member, so that the game ball is moved to the first ball discharge port or It can be pushed into the second outlet. Thereby, it is possible to reliably perform the reception of the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and the exit to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member is a disk-side magnet disposed as the magnet disposed on the disk member, and the facing wall member in a direction of a magnetic pole attracting the disk-side magnet. The disk-side magnet and the facing-side magnet are arranged such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disk member are formed of the facing wall member. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position that attracts each other at a rotational position of the disk member that is closer to the first and second outlet holes of the facing wall member than the inlet hole. 16.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles attracting the disc member and the facing wall member, respectively. When the disk member rotates, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member by using the magnetic force (attracting force) of the disk side magnet and the facing magnet. It can suppress that inertia force becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disc member have a first outlet port and a second outlet port of the facing wall member rather than the entrance port of the facing wall member. Since the disk members on the side closer to the position of the disk member are disposed at positions where they are attracted to each other, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force can be appropriately applied to the disk member. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. The rotation of the disk member can be smoothly and promptly advanced without generating. On the other hand, when the rotation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases. However, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed using magnetic force. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member includes a facing magnet disposed on the facing wall member and configured as a magnet, and the facing magnet is a first receiving portion of the disk member. Or the position corresponding to the movement locus | trajectory which the game ball accommodated in the 2nd receiving part moves with rotation operation | movement of the said disk member, Comprising: The 1st ball outlet and the 1 2. A gaming machine 17 which is disposed on the side close to the ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the facing side magnet is a game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the disk member. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the movement trajectory that moves with the rotation operation, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet (the force that attracts the game ball) is used to A rotation resistance can be made to act on a plate member, and it can control that inertia force of a disk member becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In addition, since the facing magnet is disposed closer to the first outlet and the second outlet than the entrance of the facing wall member, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force is appropriately applied to the disk member. Can do. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotating operation of the disk member without generating (a force to attract the game ball). On the other hand, at the stage where the rotational movement of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, and the inertia of the disk member is utilized by utilizing the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball). Force can be suppressed. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 17, the game ball can be used as a target on which the magnetic force by the facing magnet is applied, so there is no need to arrange a magnet on the disc member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 16 or 17, the facing magnet is disposed at a position spaced apart from the disk side magnet or the game ball by a predetermined distance in the radial direction of the disk member, and around the disk member. A gaming machine 18, wherein a plurality of gaming machines 18 are arranged along the direction.

  According to the gaming machine 18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 16 or 17, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of a plurality of facing magnets arranged along the circumferential direction is utilized. Rotational resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member. That is, when a rotational resistance is suddenly applied to the disk member, the brake member is suddenly braked and the rotational operation of the disk member becomes unstable. Therefore, the first receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance port or The reception by the second receiving part and the discharge of the game ball to the first discharge port or the second discharge port are inhibited. In contrast, according to the gaming machine 18, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member can be smoothly decelerated or stopped, and the rotating operation of the disk member can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In the gaming machine 18, the closer the plurality of facing magnets to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer to the disc member radial direction from the disk side magnet or the game ball. The gaming machine 19 is characterized in that the amount of separation is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 18, the closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer the plurality of facing magnets are from the disc side magnet or game ball to the circle. Since the amount of separation of the plate member in the radial direction is reduced, the effect of the magnetic force by the facing magnet is increased as the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion approaches the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can do. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 19, the sorting member includes a shaft portion that is pivotally supported by the facing wall member, and extends from the shaft portion and protrudes into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. And a braking member having a projecting piece and a facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the projecting piece and arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, It is pushed up as the projecting piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball which is drained from the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the member and passes through the first or second outlet of the facing wall member. The gaming machine 20 is characterized in that the facing piece of the braking member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 20, the braking member has a protruding piece extending from the shaft portion pivotally supported by the facing wall member protruding into the first outlet or the second outlet, and the protruding piece. A game ball that is disposed facing the outer peripheral surface of the disc member and facing away from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disc member, the facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the disc member When the ball passes through the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port of the facing wall member, the game ball pushes down the protruding piece of the brake member, and the brake member is rotated about the shaft portion, whereby the brake member Since the facing piece is pushed up, the pushed-up facing piece of the braking member can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the braking member is operated using a game ball passing through the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, and the operation of bringing the facing piece of the brake member into contact with the disk member can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Therefore, power and control for such operations can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 20, the facing wall member includes a storage portion that is a recessed space recessed in a surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the braking member is operable in the recessed space of the storage portion. A gaming machine 21 that is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 21, the storage portion that operably stores the braking member is recessed in the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. It can be blocked by the outer peripheral surface. That is, the braking member stored in the storage unit can be operatively held between the recessed space of the storage unit and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, a member that holds the braking member (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as a disk member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for holding the brake member. You can plan.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. 22.

  According to the gaming machine 22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, the frictional force between the disk member and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member can be secured, and the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be easily exhibited. In addition, since the elastic member is composed of a rubber-like elastic body, when the elastic member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member, the braking member, and the like are reduced. Since it can absorb by elastic deformation, the effect | action which decelerates or stops a disk member can be exhibited stably. Furthermore, for example, a concave-convex shape is formed as compared with a structure in which the disc member is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member. Since it is not necessary, the shape of the part can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member is characterized in that the facing piece is heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine 23, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member has a facing piece heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity position is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion. When the protruding piece is pushed down and the facing piece is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when rotated in one direction around the shaft), the weight of the braking member (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft) Using this, the brake member can be rotated in the other direction and returned to the initial position. Therefore, there is no need to provide an urging member for applying an urging force for returning to the initial position, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine 24 according to any one of the gaming machines 20 to 23, wherein the facing piece of the braking member is formed to be elastically deformable in a direction approaching or separating from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 24, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines 20 to 23, the facing piece of the braking member is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances such as the disc member and the braking member can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece. The action of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be stably exhibited. Similarly, the variation of the position where the passing game ball pushes down the protruding piece and the passing direction can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece, so that the game ball is prevented from being bounced back and reliably. Can be passed. Further, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, the contact force between them (that is, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disk member) is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the rotating operation of the disk member.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. .

  According to the gaming machine 25, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball discharged to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet from being inhibited by the protruding piece, and to smoothly push down the protruding piece to the passing game ball. .

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receptacle that receive the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. And a main body that is pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, a guide portion disposed on the main body portion, and guided by the guide portion to move. And when the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body, the first receiving portion is more than the second receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates to the first angular position that is below, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the game ball received from the entrance is received. The second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game can be performed, and the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion. When the player receives the game ball, the game received by the second receiving portion is caused by the weight of the game ball and the main body portion rotating to a second angular position where the second receiving portion is below the first receiving portion. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the ball can be discharged to the second position and the game ball entered from the entrance can be received. At the first angular position, the guide portion is the first The moving body is moved downward to the receiving portion side and moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward to the second receiving portion side and the moving body is moved. Is moved to the second receiving portion side.

  According to the gaming machine 26, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 26 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the part, for example, after being rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body part to be maintained at the second angular position may return to the first angular position. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 26, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that moves while being guided by the guide unit, the guide unit is the first receiving unit at the first angular position. The moving body is moved downward toward the first receiving portion and moved toward the first receiving portion. At the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion and the moving body is moved toward the second receiving portion. Since it is moved, it is possible to maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first In the case where the two receiving portions are positioned below), the guide body is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion, so that the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main body portion is rotated to the first angular position, the moving body moves toward the first receiving portion side. The main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted. A gaming machine 27 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a guide portion. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the moving body according to the rotation direction of the main body can be achieved with a simple structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost, to enable stable operation, and to improve the reliability.

  In the gaming machine 27, the moving body is a ringed end material made of an elastic material.

  According to the gaming machine 28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 27, the moving body is formed by forming a ringed end material made of an elastic material, so that the work of mounting the moving body on the guide portion is facilitated. As a result, the number of assembly steps can be reduced. That is, when the moving body is mounted on the guide portion, a part of the moving body can be opened by elastic deformation, and the rod-shaped guide portion can be inserted into the annular moving body through the opening.

  The annular shape does not need to be circular, and may be a polygonal shape or an elliptical shape as long as a rod-like moving body can be inserted into the inner periphery thereof. Further, the moving body may be a material wound around, a material cut out from the material, or a material punched from the material.

  The gaming machine 29 according to the gaming machine 29, wherein the moving body is wound around the end material and the ends are overlapped with each other.

  According to the gaming machine 29, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 28, the end portions of the moving body are overlapped with each other, and accordingly, the amount of elastic deformation necessary to open a part of the moving body is large. Become. Therefore, it can suppress that the mobile body with which the guide part was mounted | worn falls off. In addition, since the moving body is formed by winding a material, the manufacturing can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine 30, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section, so that the contact area between the two is reduced and the sliding resistance is reduced. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the guide portion is tilted downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body can be reliably moved along the downward tilt without stopping in the middle, and the movement of the mobile body (Changing the center of gravity position) can be performed quickly. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a passage shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a spherical shape that rolls on the guide portion or A gaming machine 31 that is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine 31, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in the shape of a passage extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the guide portion is rotated. Since the moving body is formed in a moving spherical or cylindrical shape, when the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body is reliably and quickly moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion. Can be moved to.

  For example, in a structure where the moving body slides on the guide part, the sliding resistance is large, so the moving body that moves along the descending slope of the guide part may stop halfway, and the moving speed is slow, The movement of the body (change in the position of the center of gravity) may not be in time. On the other hand, if the moving body is formed in a spherical or cylindrical shape and rolls on the guide portion as in the gaming machine 31, the moving body can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end and moved. It is possible to quickly move the body (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 27, the guide portion includes a box body that is open on one surface side, and a lid body that is attached to the one surface side of the box body, and an internal space formed between the box body and the lid body. A game machine 32, wherein the moving body is accommodated in the game machine 32.

  According to the gaming machine 32, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 27, the guide unit includes a box body that is open on one side and a lid that is attached to the one side of the box body. Since the moving body is housed in the internal space formed between the lids, it is possible to facilitate the work of holding the moving body in the guide portion so that it can be guided, and to reduce the assembly man-hours.

  In the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material, and the fastening screw is fastened. A gaming machine 33, wherein a portion to be fastened is formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 33, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material. The fastened portions to which the fastening screws are fastened are formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, respectively. The fastening screw and the part to be fastened can be positioned at a part that becomes a downwardly inclined end when the guide part is downwardly inclined with the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to reinforce the portion that becomes the descending inclined end and to suppress the damage due to the collision of the moving body. Moreover, since the structure for fastening and fixing the box and the lid can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the moving body collides (the portion that becomes the descending inclined end), a member for reinforcement is provided separately. The product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion includes a recess portion formed by recessing one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion downward. Characteristic gaming machine 34.

  According to the gaming machine 34, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion has a lower end on one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Since the hollow portion is formed, the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body portion, and when the moving body moves to one end side or the other end side along the downward inclination, the moving body Can be prevented from bouncing back to the rising slope side.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion is curved in an arc shape so that a central portion is below the one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. A gaming machine 35 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine 35, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion has a lower central portion than one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Therefore, in the state where the guide portion is inclined downward in accordance with the rotation operation of the main body portion, the gradient on the upward inclination side can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to reliably and promptly move the moving body that has been positioned on the ascending slope side of the guide portion as the main body portion rotates. In particular, in the configuration in which the annular moving body slides on the rod-shaped guide portion, the frictional resistance is large, so there is a possibility that the movement of the moving body positioned on the rising slope side may not be started. On the other hand, the gaming machine 35 is particularly effective.

  The gaming machine 36 according to any one of the gaming machines 26 to 35, wherein the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material, and the moving body is made of a metal material.

  According to the gaming machine 36, in any of the gaming machines 26 to 35, since the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material and the moving body is made of a metal material, the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body Change can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion, and a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion. A game that has a main body that is pivotally supported around the center and a center of gravity position moving means that moves the position of the center of gravity as the main body rotates. When the ball is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the main body portion rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving portion is lower than the second receiving portion by the weight of the game ball. The game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball received from the entrance can be received. When the game ball that has entered the mouth is received by the second receiving portion of the main body, the second receiving portion is weighted by the game ball. When the main body rotates to a second angular position below the first receiving part, the game ball received by the second receiving part is discharged to the second position, and the ball enters from the entrance. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received, and the center-of-gravity position moving means is pivotably suspended on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, respectively. A pair of hanging bodies, proximity means for bringing the hanging body located on the upper side close to the body section when the body is rotated to the first angular position or the second angular position, and a position on the upper side A game machine 37, comprising: release means for releasing the approach to the main body by the approach means to the suspended body and hanging the body.

  According to the gaming machine 37, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 37 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the unit, when the game unit is rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body unit to be maintained at the second angular position is flipped up by the repulsive force during the ball discharging operation of the game ball. In some cases, the first angular position may be reversed. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 37, a pair of suspended bodies that are pivotably suspended respectively on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, and the first angular position or the second angular position. When the main body is rotated, the proximity means for bringing the suspended body located on the upper side closer to the main body and the proximity means for the hanging body located on the upper side are released from the proximity to the main body and suspended. The center-of-gravity position moving means having the releasing means to be moved is provided, so that the center-of-gravity position can be moved in accordance with the rotation of the main body, and thereby the main body is supposed to be in a posture (first angular position or second angular position). ) Can be maintained.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first 2 position is located below), the suspended body located on the upper side (first receiving part side) is brought close to the main body part, and the suspended body located on the lower side (second receiving part side). Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main ball portion is rotated to the first angular position, the drooping located on the upper side (first receiving portion side). While the body is brought close to the main body, and the hanging body located on the lower side (second receiving portion side) is suspended, the main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member is disposed on the hanging body in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the main body side magnet disposed as the magnet and disposed on the main body portion between the pair of hanging bodies. A suspension-side magnet that is disposed and configured as a magnet, and the proximity means magnetizes the suspension-side magnet to the body-side magnet so that the suspension body positioned on the upper side is attached to the body A gaming machine 38 characterized in that the game machine 38 is maintained in a state of being close to the portion.

  According to the gaming machine 38, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet to maintain the drooping body located on the upper side close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, and the reliability of the proximity and the releasing operation thereof can be improved. Improvements can be made.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member includes a main body side magnet arranged as a magnet between the pair of hanging bodies and configured as a magnet, and the pair of hanging bodies are made of a magnetic material, The gaming machine 39, wherein the proximity means maintains the suspended body positioned on the upper side close to the body portion by magnetizing the suspended body to the body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 39, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the hanging body to maintain the hanging body located on the upper side in a state close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified and the reliability of the proximity and its release operation can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained close to each other. Can be achieved.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to arrange | position a magnet only to a main-body part because a pair of drooping body is comprised from a magnetic material. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which magnets are provided on each of the main body and the hanging body, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced by the amount that the magnet disposed on the hanging body can be eliminated. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the hanging body is made of a magnetic material, its weight can be increased, and accordingly, to the lower side of the center of gravity position due to the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)). The amount of movement can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 38 or 39, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body portion, and a proximity protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body portion. The drooping body includes an extending piece that extends from the drooping body and that can be locked to the proximity protrusion when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. The means is that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the body portion is locked to the proximity protrusion, so that the hanging body is brought close to the body portion, A gaming machine 40, wherein a drooping body composed of the drooping side magnet or the magnetic material is magnetically attached to a main body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 40, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 38 or 39, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and a proximity that protrudes from the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the proximity projection when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. Since the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the protrusion for proximity, the hanging body is brought close to the main body portion, and the main body side magnet A drooping body composed of a drooping side magnet or a magnetic material can be magnetized. Thereby, the drooping body located on the upper side can be reliably brought close to the main body. In addition, the hanging body can be brought close to the main body by locking the extending piece to the proximity protrusion, that is, assisting the magnetic attachment of the hanging magnet or the hanging body to the main body side magnet. Since the magnetic force of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet can be weakened, the cost of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and when the drooping body is located on the lower side, the proximity state can be released. It can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body, a release protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body, And the hanging body includes an extending piece that extends from the hanging body and that can be locked to the release protrusion when positioned on the lower side as the main body rotates. The proximity means is configured such that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side as the body portion is rotated is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the body portion. The gaming machine 41 is characterized in that the proximity of the drooping body to the main body by the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping body or a drooping body made of a magnetic material is released.

  According to the gaming machine 41, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the releasing projection when positioned downward as the main body rotates. Since the extension piece is provided, the extension piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the main body portion, and the main body The magnetic attachment of the side magnet and the drooping side magnet (proximity of the drooping body to the main body) can be released. Thereby, the hanging body located on the lower side can be suspended and the center of gravity as a whole can be moved reliably.

  One extended piece serves as both the extended piece in the gaming machine 40 and the extended piece in the gaming machine 41 (that is, it can be locked to both the proximity protrusion and the release protrusion). It is preferable to configure as described above. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the extending piece for locking to the protruding portion for proximity and the extending piece for locking to the hanging portion for releasing the protrusion on the hanging body. Can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a rotation shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to a tip end thereof, so that the length of the main body portion is from the rotation shaft. The at least one main body side magnet that is larger than the length to the center and is disposed in the main body portion maintains one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies close to the main body portion. A gaming machine 42 that can be used as a magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 42, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip end, Since it is made larger than the length dimension from the rotation axis to the center of the main body, at least one main body side magnet disposed in the main body is in a state where one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies are close to the main body. It can also be used as a magnet for maintaining the above. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. In addition, in this way, by making the length of the hanging body larger than the length from the pivot shaft to the center of the main body, the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) ), The amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position can be increased, and as a result, the main body can be easily maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  In any one of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are arranged such that the center of gravity is located on the tip side from the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip. A gaming machine 43 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 43, in any of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are more on the distal side than the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft supported pivotally to the main body portion to the distal end. Since the center of gravity position is arranged, the amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position associated with the displacement of the drooping body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) can be increased. The first angle position or the second angle position) can be easily maintained.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63a First start port 63b Second start port 1000, 3000, 10000 Sorting device (sorting member)
1110L Left guide passage (first guide or second guide)
1110R Right guidance path (second guidance part or first guidance part)
1220 facing wall member 1221 entrance 1222L left exit (first exit or second exit)
1222R Right exit port (second exit port or first exit port)
1300 Disc member 1310L Left receiving part (first receiving part or second receiving part)
1310R Right receiving part (second receiving part or first receiving part)
1311 Bottom (receiving surface)
1320 Pushing plate (pushing part)
1223L Left groove (first groove or second groove)
1223R right groove (second groove or first groove)
1226 Face-to-face magnet 1330 One-way clutch 3120L Left communication hole (first guide part or part of second guide part)
3120R right communication hole (second guide or part of first guide)
3220a, 3220b, 3220c Wall member (first guide part or part of second guide part)
3300, 4300, 5300, 8300, 9300, 10300, 11300 Support plate member (main body)
2230 Storage part 2240 Braking member 2241 Shaft part 2242 Protruding piece 2243 Face piece 2244 Elastic member 3330 Central plate (a part of the first receiving part or the second receiving part)
3340L Left receiving plate (part of first receiving portion or second receiving portion)
3340R Right receiving plate (second receiving part or part of first receiving part)
3350, 4350, 5350 Guide part 5350a, 9350a Depression part 3400, 6400, 7400, 8400 Weight member (moving body)
8350, 9350 Box (part of the guide)
8351 Fastened hole (part of the fastened part)
8360 Lid (part of guide)
8370 Fastening screw 10100 Substrate member 10141 Upper projection (proximity projection, part of proximity means)
10142 Lower protrusion (release protrusion, part of release means)
10360L, 11360L Left weight member (hanging body, part of proximity means, part of gravity center position moving means)
10360R, 11360R Right weight member (hanging body, part of proximity means, part of center of gravity position moving means)
10370L Left locking piece (extension piece, proximity means and part of release means)
10370R Right locking piece (extension piece, part of proximity means and release means)
10380 Magnet (main body side magnet, part of proximity means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided in the game area, lottery of the game is lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies the lottery result is executed on the display device Is done.

  In this configuration, a plurality of start openings are provided, and depending on the entry of the game balls into the respective start openings, whether or not the game is individually drawn by lottery, and dynamically displaying special symbols corresponding to the respective start openings, There are known ones that notify the lottery result. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters the first start port, a dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, and when a game ball enters the second start port, the second special symbol moves. A gaming machine on which a target display is executed is disclosed.

JP 2005-319221 A

  Thus, the player may use different positions in the game area as target positions (in the above example, the first start port and the second start port). However, it is difficult to guide the game balls equally (for example, to enter the first start port and the second start port) with respect to different target positions in the game area. For example, there is a problem in that the guidance is biased toward the first start port only).

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can evenly guide game balls to different target positions in a game area.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a gaming area, in which a gaming ball flows down, receives the flowing gaming ball, and receives the weight of the received gaming ball. The distribution member is provided with a distribution member that alternately distributes the game balls to the first position and the second position, and the distribution member includes a ball entrance that receives game balls flowing down the game area. A main body portion having a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion for receiving a game ball that has entered the entrance, and pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. , plan an internal, the is moved in accordance with the rotation of the main body portion along the shape of the guide portion and a mounting member disposed in said body portion, gaming balls which have entered the special entering-sphere outlet Is received by the first receiving portion of the main body, the first receiving portion is more than the second receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates to the first angular position that is below, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the game ball received from the entrance is received. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the second receiving portion is arranged, and when the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball causes the second receiving portion to When the main body rotates to a second angular position below the first receiving part, the game ball received by the second receiving part is discharged to the second position, and the ball enters from the entrance. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received, and at the first angular position, the first receiving portion side of the guide portion is positioned below the second receiving portion side; wherein the mounting member with the rotation of the said first angular position of the main body portion along the shape of the guide portion It is moved to the first receiving portion, wherein in the second angular position, the second receiving portion of the guide portion is positioned below the first receiving portion side, to the second angular position of the main body portion With the rotation, the arrangement member is moved toward the second receiving portion along the shape of the guide portion .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game machine includes the sorting member that receives the game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the position and the second position as the target position, it is possible to guide the game ball equally to different target positions in the game area.

  In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that is guided and moved by the guide unit are provided, and at the first angular position, the guide unit is inclined downward toward the first receiving unit side to move the moving body. Is moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion side, and the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. It is possible to maintain the main body portion in a posture (first angular position or second angular position) that should be originally used by utilizing the change in the gravity center position accompanying the.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the sorting device schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first start opening, and (b) FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus schematically illustrated to explain the operation of distributing to two start ports. It is drawing for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (a) is the figure which showed the area | region division setting and effective line setting of the display screen typically, (b) is an actual figure. It is the figure which illustrated before and after rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in a display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of a distribution apparatus, (b) is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow VIIb direction view of Fig.7 (a). (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow VIIIb direction view of Fig.8 (a), (c) is the arrow VIIIc of Fig.8 (a). It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member in the direction view. (A) is a front view of the front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the direction of arrow IXb in FIG. 9 (a), and (c) is IXc− in FIG. 9 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front member in an IXc line. (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow Xb direction view of Fig.10 (a). It is sectional drawing of the facing wall member in the XI-XI line of FIG.9 (c). It is the plane expanded view which expanded and illustrated the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member in the arrow XII direction view of Fig.10 (a). (A) is a top view of a disk member, (b) is a front view of the disk member in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13 (a), and (c) is a front view of FIG. 13 (b). It is a bottom view of the disk member in the arrow XIIIc direction view. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. It is sectional drawing of the front member in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow XXb direction view of Fig.20 (a). (A) is a side view of a braking member, (b) is a top view of the braking member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIb in FIG. 21 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of a distribution device, (a) is the state before the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball, (b) is the state after the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball. , Respectively. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a sorting apparatus, (b) is a side view of a sorting apparatus. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXVb direction view of Fig.25 (a). (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the arrow XXVIb direction view of Fig.26 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 27 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXVIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of a weight member, (b) is a side view of the weight member in the arrow XXVIIIb direction view of Fig.28 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVb direction view of Fig.34 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVc direction view of 34 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVa-XXXVa line | wire of FIG.34 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVb-XXXVb line | wire of Fig.34 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXXIXb direction view of Fig.39 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 40 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XLc direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XLIa-XLIa line | wire of FIG.40 (b), (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 2nd angle position from a 1st angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 2nd angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 1st angle position from a 2nd angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 1st angle position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (c) is a 2nd angle position. It is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 18, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 63a, the second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A sorting apparatus 1000 is provided at the lower center of the game area. In the sorting apparatus 1000, a normal electric accessory 64 is provided at the top. In a normal state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 stands upward while the facing blades 64a and 64b face each other at a predetermined interval (an interval in which a game ball can enter approximately one ball (the diameter of the game ball is approximately 11 mm)). Arranged in a state. In a normal state (a state in which the blades 64a and 64b stand up), the route through which the game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000 is only a route that passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. The player first fires the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64.

  When a game ball enters the distribution device 630, the entered game ball is alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution apparatus 1000 will be described.

  FIG. 4 (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically shown for explaining the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the ball game balls to the second start port 63b.

  As shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the sorting device 1000 has a disc member 1300 that is rotatably mounted therein, and an outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 includes The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are recessed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), when the left game unit 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 depends on the weight of the game ball (that is, the weight of the game ball is equivalent to the disc). The center of gravity of the member 1300 is decentered to one side (right side in FIG. 4 (a)) with respect to the rotation center), while the disc member 1300 stores the game ball in the left receiving portion 1310L, (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction). When the left receiving portion 1310L reaches downward by the rotation of the disc member 1300, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L and the left guide passage 1110L 1 It is guided to the start port 63a.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the sorting apparatus 1000 receives the game ball that has entered next to the game ball shown in FIG. 4A by the right receiving portion 1310R. That is, in the sorting apparatus 1000, the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed 180 degrees out of phase with the left receiving portion 1310L, and when the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned below, the right receiving portion 1310R is positioned above and It is comprised so that the game ball which carried out the ball can be received alternately.

  In this case, when the right receiving portion 1310R receives the next game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 uses the weight of the game ball in the same manner as when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball. 1300 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction) while storing the game ball in the right receiving portion 1310R, and the right receiving portion 1310R reaches downward. The game ball stored in the right receiving portion 1310R is guided to the second start port 63b by being discharged into the right guide passage 1110R.

  As described above, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a and the right receiving portion 1310R moves upward. The right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has been placed and then entered. When the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and the left receiving portion 1310L is disposed upward. Next, the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered.

  Therefore, the sorting apparatus 1000 can evenly distribute the game balls to be entered into the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to be awarded, and as a result, the first start port 63a is caused by winning. It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second starting port 63b.

  Returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is activated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64, which is normally maintained in the upright state, stand up substantially vertically. It moves substantially in a V shape (inverted C shape) and guides the game balls by the blades 64a and 64b, so that the game balls can easily enter the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation display is not executed among the balls won at the first starting port 63a, the second starting port 63b, and the normal symbol starting port 67. This is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning at the first start port 63a elapses (in the present embodiment, the center segment of the seven segments blinks). After that, the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  In addition, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the rough fluctuation pattern time information described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) also falls under this category.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, whether or not a big hit is determined (big hit lottery), and the determination of the big hit type Do. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R normal jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the type of jackpot (in this embodiment, for example, “9” for 15R regular jackpot, “7” for 15R probability variation jackpot, “3” for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. After the jackpot, a game with a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability is set. That is. “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, which will be described later, is set. “2R probability variation jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of two rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability is set.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third symbol (the first symbol) in synchronism with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with a winning (starting award) to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8 inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, so that one of the third symbols is displayed in the left display area Dm1. The three symbol sequences of left, middle and right showing the first special symbol are displayed (see FIG. 5A). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, the second special symbol which is one of the third symbols is also displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying before and after rearrangement of the reserved symbol display on the actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying a holding symbol (the number of the first lottery game and the second lottery game on hold) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured so as to be divided into a left display area Dm1 and a right display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning to the first starting port 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning to the second starting port 63b is variably displayed.

  In the left display area Dm1, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the main symbol numbers are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the main symbol numbers appear in ascending order. On the other hand, the second special symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

  Further, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1 in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight small area reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of three special symbols (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display area Dm, respectively in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. The

  In the present embodiment, winnings to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b are each suspended up to four times. If a game ball wins at the first start opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) in the lower display area Ds. ) In the display area in which no reserved symbol is displayed, “○”, which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed in the lowest-numbered reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side). .

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, as in the case where the first start opening 63a wins, the reserved symbol “●” below the second lottery game is displayed. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. When a game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000, the game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b in order (that is, alternately). Whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed when the first start symbol 63a is won in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and there is no hold in the first lottery game. Regardless, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1, and then stopped. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 63b, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable display.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 at the same time. Therefore, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed by distributing the game balls to be alternately awarded to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 1000. it can. In the first lottery game and the second lottery game, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the jackpot game is executed, so that the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game. It is possible to increase the number of times and increase the chance that the player can win a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding lottery games are supported. Of course, it is also possible to provide each start port and to simultaneously display each lottery result in a variable manner.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  A horizontally-long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game jackpot in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is set so that after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop pattern is obtained. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the corresponding display area (the left display area Dm1 or the right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display apparatus 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined according to the determined jackpot type. For example, if it is a 15R normal jackpot, it can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is winning based on winning in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, The opening / closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (not shown) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number. Counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, hour / hour counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First jackpot flag 203o, second jackpot flag 203p, first variation stop flag 203q, second variation stop flag 203r, first variation time storage area 203s, second variation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. Having at least a memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 63a up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second start opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are used for counters when a start winning is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the buffer is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 63a during the timer interruption process, the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and the first reserved ball storage area 203a. Are stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and corresponding to each. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start port 63a or the second detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the start port 63b, the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 is up to four times each. It is a counter for counting. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is counted in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 63b. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the first variation start process or the second variation start process, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data. At the same time, the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). Based on this, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 88) performed on the first symbol display device 37 ( It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. As an initial value, zero is set by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing a normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol start port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process, the MPU 201 acquires the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 from the counter buffer, It is stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is turned on and stored (stored) in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. Yes. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing from the holding area where the data is vacant in the order of passing to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize). Is done.

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or first This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is in a variable display. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time reduction count is set, the normal symbol random table for high probability is set in the normal symbol random table 202c until the time reduction count is set to zero. In addition, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 have a longer opening time than in the normal gaming state (in this embodiment, 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the random number table for the normal symbol for the low probability of the winning random number counter 202c is set and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the release time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are opened.

  The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 15R probability variable jackpot game is executed, a flag that is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game has ended It is. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating the big hit (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the big hit game, depending on the big hit type, If it is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, it is set to ON.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the first start port 63a. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the second start port 63b. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a win while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process, the first special symbol variation display is set to OFF when the temporary display is performed.

  The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a win while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process, it is set to OFF when the temporary display process of the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol starts to be varied, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variation time storage area 203t counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and obtains time measurement data from the RTC at the time of the variation start. The configuration may also be such that timekeeping data is acquired and the fluctuation time is measured at any time thereafter. In addition, it is naturally possible to have a configuration in which the variation time for variation display is stored in advance and the value is subtracted as needed.

  The rearrangement hold storage area 203u is stored in each of the hold areas 1 to 4 stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process or the second prefetch process. This is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on data is stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a first variation start flag 223c1, a second variation start flag 223c2, 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, slave first variation stop flag 223e, slave second variation stop flag 223f, slave first variation restart flag 223g, slave second variation restart flag 223h, slave first A variable time storage area 223i, a secondary second variable time storage area 223j, a secondary rearranged storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is analyzed by the command determination process. Then, processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  Similarly to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 is the second special symbol held by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The sub first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first change restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the change display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control device 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the setting is turned off.

  The second change restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the change display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of resuming the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the first variable time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the fluctuation time of the actual fluctuation display is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the second variation time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the actual change time of the variable display is stored.

  In the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, data similar to the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is received from the main control device 110 based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control is performed. This is a storage area that is stored based on a winning command output to the device 113.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is read from the backup area, and each corresponding hold area in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is changing. Stored in the data storage area.

  In the start-up process, as in the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process, all winning commands are generated based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203u from which the backed-up data is read and stored. By outputting to the lamp controller 113, data synchronized with the same rearrangement storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k.

  In addition, in the start-up process, a configuration in which data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is synchronized even when returning from a power failure by transmitting a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores each data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k as backup data in the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Anyway, of course.

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is activated when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is turned on). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, a detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b).

  FIG. 7A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 1000, and FIG. 7B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 1000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the sorting apparatus 1000 is disposed on the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8) and the front side of the substrate member 1100 (the front side in FIG. 7). A front member 1200 (see FIGS. 9 to 12) and a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 1100 and the front member 1200 (internal space). Then, the game balls that have entered the ball are alternately distributed to two positions (first start port 63a and second start port 63b in the present embodiment) of the first position and the second position (see FIG. 4).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 1100, the front member 1200, and the disk member 1300 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 8A is a front view of the substrate member 1100, FIG. 8B is a side view of the substrate member 1100 in the direction of arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member 1100 in the arrow VIIIc direction view of Fig.8 (a). In FIG. 8A, the front member 1200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 1200 with respect to the substrate member 1100.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, the board member 1100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 1100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four positions in the central portion of the substrate member 1100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A), and the front side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A front side of the paper). ) And the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed.

  Two guide paths (a left guide path 1110L and a right guide path 1110R) are disposed below the center of the substrate member 1100. The left guide passage 1110L and the right guide passage 1110R receive the game balls discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the disc member 1300, and receive the received game balls in the first start port. 63a and a passage for guiding to the second starting port 63b (see FIG. 4), and openings (left opening 1111L and right opening 1111R) serving as entrances for game balls are formed to open upward on one end side. The opening serving as the outlet of the game ball is formed in a state where it is communicated with the left communication hole 1120L and the right communication hole 1120R on the other end side.

  The left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 8C) of the board member 1100 with respect to the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R. That is, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are juxtaposed along the front-rear direction of the board member 1100 (the vertical direction in FIG. 8A), whereby the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100. In the state, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are respectively communicated with the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 is inserted into the left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L via the left exit port 1222L of the front member 1200 and the disc member 1300. The game balls discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R are respectively introduced into the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R through the right discharge port 1222R of the front member 1200 (see FIGS. 14 to 18).

  A first start port 63a is connected to the left communication hole 1120L of the board member 1100, and a second start port 63b is connected to the right communication hole 1120R (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the left guide passage 1110L guides the game ball introduced from the left opening 1111L to the left communication hole 1120L and causes the first start port 63a to win. On the other hand, the right guide passage 1110R guides the game ball introduced from the right opening 1111R to the right communication hole 1120R and wins the second start port 63b.

  Next, the entire configuration of the front member 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9A is a front view of the front member 1200, FIG. 9B is a side view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb in FIG. 9A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the front member 1200 in the IXc-IXc line | wire of Fig.9 (a). FIG. 10A is a rear view of the front member 1200, and FIG. 10B is a top view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Xb in FIG. 10A.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the front member 1200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and a cylindrical facing wall member 1220 disposed on the back side (front side in FIG. 10) of the front plate 1210. And a shaft member 1230 disposed concentrically on the inner peripheral side of the facing wall member 1220, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The facing wall member 1220 is a portion in which a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) is rotatably mounted, and the inner diameter dimension thereof is the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the disk member 1300. Set to

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed such that the opening on one end side in the axial direction (right side in FIG. 9C) is closed by the front plate member 1210 and the opening on the other end side in the axial direction (left side in FIG. 9C) is opened. Is done. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 1100 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). That is, the assembling of the sorting device 1000 is performed by inserting the disc member 1300 from the open side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 1200 and fastening and fixing the substrate member 1100 to thereby attach the disc member 1300 to the sorting device 1000. The interior can be rotated and cannot be removed. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed with a ball inlet 1221, a left ball outlet 1222 </ b> L and a right ball outlet 1222 </ b> R, a left groove 1223 </ b> L and a right groove 1223 </ b> R, a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225.

  The entrance 1221 is an opening through which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and is formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the uppermost portion of the facing wall member 1220. In addition, the entrance 1221 is the center of the facing wall member 1220 in the axial direction (FIG. 9 (c) left and right direction) (that is, both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the rotating member 1300). A game ball that is disposed at a position where the movement trajectory overlaps and is entered can be received (guided) by either the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R are for introducing the game balls conveyed by the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 into the left guiding passage 1110L and the right guiding passage 1110R of the board member 1100. And is drilled along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the lowermost portion of the facing wall member 1220 (that is, a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance 1221).

  The left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are spaced apart from each other in the axial direction of the facing wall member 1220 (FIG. 9 (c) left and right direction), and the left receiving portion 1310L when the disk member 1300 is rotated and They are arranged on the movement trajectory on the exit side (the inclined side surface 1312 side, see FIG. 13) of the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left groove 1223 </ b> L and the right groove 1223 </ b> R are concave grooves having an arcuate cross section that are recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and extend along the circumferential direction of the facing wall member 1220. When the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is conveyed toward the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R as the disc member 1300 rotates, one of the game balls The portion can be received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (see, for example, FIG. 15).

  The curvature radii of the inner peripheral surfaces of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R (the arc shape in the cross section perpendicular to the extending direction) are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the curvature radius of the game ball. Therefore, when the disc member 1300 is rotated in a state where the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R, the game ball rolls or slides on the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R.

  The guide inclined portion 1224 is a concave portion whose upper surface side is opened and the ball entrance 1221 is opened on the bottom surface, and the inner wall of the concave portion is formed as four inclined surfaces inclined downward toward the ball entrance 1221. (See FIG. 10B). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down into the guide inclined portion 1224 can be guided to the entrance port 1221 and surely entered.

  Since the inner wall of the guide inclined portion 1224 is made higher (larger) than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball can be held inside (in the recess space). In other words, when a game ball cannot be introduced from the entrance hole 1221 to the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion is rotated along with the rotation of the disc member 1300. The game ball can be held inside the guide inclined portion 1224 until the portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221. When the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221 along with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the held game ball is passed through the entrance 1221. It can be promptly introduced into the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The tightened hole 1225 is a screw hole opened on the end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 10) of the facing wall member 1220, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 1100b (see FIG. 8) of the substrate member 1100. In other words, the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100 by fastening the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 1100 b from the back side of the board member 1100 into the fastening hole 1225 of the facing wall member 1220.

  A facing side magnet 1226 is embedded in the outer peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. The facing magnet 1226 is a magnet for applying a magnetic force (attracting force) to the game ball conveyed toward the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R, and extends in the extending direction of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R. A plurality (three in the present embodiment) are arranged along the line.

  On the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, a shaft portion 1230 is erected vertically from the back surface of the front plate member 1210. The shaft portion 1230 is concentrically disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and is used as a shaft that pivotally supports the disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a detailed configuration of the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R, the left groove 1223L, and the right groove 1223R of the front member 1200 will be described.

  11 is a cross-sectional view of the facing wall member 1220 along the line XI-XI in FIG. 9C, and FIG. 12 is a plan view of the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. FIG.

  Since the left outlet 1222L has the same configuration as the right outlet 1222R and the left groove 1223L has the same structure as the right groove 1223R, only the right outlet 1222R and the right groove 1223R will be described here, and the left outlet 1222L. The description of the left groove 1223L is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the right vent hole 1222R is a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 11) to the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 11) of the facing wall member 1220. Formed as. In other words, the right ball outlet 1222R is a hole that extends in an inclined direction toward the rotation direction of the disc member 1300 (the direction away from the right groove 1223R in FIG. 11). It is formed. Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disk member 1300 smoothly enters the right discharge port 1222R of the facing wall member 1220, and without entering the game ball. It can be made to pass to an exit (refer FIG.16 (b)).

  The right discharge port 1222R is an opening edge on the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, and the position of the opening edge on the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R (left side in FIG. 11) is the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R. Rather than the center of the facing wall member 1220 (ie, the side closer to the disk member 1300, the upper side in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball reaches the right drainage port 1222R (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) while accepting (inserting) a part thereof in the right groove 1223R, the outer peripheral surface of the game ball is It can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the right outlet port 1222R (the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R, the left side in FIG. 11) (see FIG. 16B). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped.

  The right groove 1223R has a terminal end (lower end in FIG. 12) connected to the right ball outlet 1222R, and a starting end (upper end in FIG. 12) is not connected to the ball inlet 1221. That is, the start end (upper end in FIG. 12) of the right groove 1223R is located at a position advanced by about 80 degrees from the entrance 1221. In the phase range of about 80 degrees from the entrance hole 1221, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310 R is not substantially in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (FIGS. 14B and 15A). This is because the recess in the right groove 1223R is wasted. Thereby, the strength reduction of the facing wall member 1220 due to unnecessary recesses can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved. On the other hand, by making the starting end of the right groove 1223R a little (about 10 degrees) ahead of the position where the phase is advanced 90 degrees from the entrance 1221R, the game ball is surely introduced into the right groove 1223R. In addition, the effect of the right groove 1223R (the rolling resistance or the sliding resistance acting on the game ball) can be maximized.

  In the right groove 1223R, the recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 is increased (deeper) toward the right ball outlet 1222R. In this case, as described above, in the right groove 1223R, the radius of curvature of the inner peripheral surface is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball.

  Therefore, when the game ball rolls or slides in the right groove 1223R with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance that acts on the game ball from the right groove 1223R is transferred to the right ball outlet 1222R. The closer it is, the larger it can be. In addition, the amount that the game ball can be received in the right groove 1223R (the amount that fits in) can be gradually increased as it approaches the right discharge hole 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the inertial force in the direction of entering the right ball outlet 1222R can be increased. Can be held in a game ball.

  On the bottom surface side of the right groove 1223R, facing magnets 1226 are arranged in a line along the extending direction of the right groove 1223R. That is, the facing-side magnet 1226 is disposed at a position corresponding to a movement trajectory in which the game ball moves as the disc member 1300 rotates. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed on the side closer to the right exit port 1222R (lower side in FIG. 12) than the entrance port 1221 of the facing wall member 1220. In the present embodiment, it is disposed within a range in which the phase is retracted by 15 degrees from the opening edge (right side in FIG. 11) of the right discharge port 1222R (the central angle is 15 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the right groove 1223, the magnetic force of the facing-side magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. Can act. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right discharge port 1222R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is used as a target on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 acts, so that it is not necessary to dispose a magnet on the disc member 1300. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced. However, a magnet may be provided on the disc member 1300 in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the facing magnet 1226.

  A plurality (three in the present embodiment) of facing magnets 1226 are disposed, and the more the facing magnets 1226 that are closer to the right discharge port 1222R, the more the game ball (that is, the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R). ) Is separated from the facing wall member 1220 in the radial direction. Therefore, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 can be increased as the game ball approaches the right exit port 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the effect of applying a magnetic force from the facing magnet 1226 to the game ball can be gradually increased, so that the rotational speed of the disk member 1300 can be smoothly reduced.

  Next, the disk member 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a top view of the disk member 1300, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the disk member 1300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A. These are the bottom views of the disc member 1300 in the arrow XIIIc direction view of FIG.13 (b). In FIG. 13B, the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are schematically illustrated by broken lines, while the push plate 1320 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the disk member 1300 is a member for transporting a game ball entered from the entrance 1221 of the facing wall member 1220 to the left exit 1222L or the right exit 1222R (FIG. 9). To FIG. 12), and is formed in a circular disk shape having a predetermined thickness (FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. 13 (c) vertical dimension) as viewed in the axial direction.

  In the following, the surface on one end side in the axial direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13B, the front side on the paper surface) is referred to as a front surface F, and the surface opposite to the front surface F is referred to as a back surface B. In the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 has a front surface F facing the front plate member 1210 (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200 and a back surface B facing the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8). Thus, it is installed between the board member 1100 and the front member 1200.

  The disc member 1300 includes a left receiving portion 1310L and a right receiving portion 1310R that are recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, a push plate 1320 that is installed in the opening portions of the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, and a front member. And a one-way clutch 1330 serving as a bearing portion supported by a shaft portion 1230 of 1200 (see FIGS. 9 and 10).

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R receive the game balls that have entered the entrance 1221, store the received game balls, and discharge them to the left exit 1222L and the right exit 1222R, respectively. The concave portions are rectangular in front view, and are arranged 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R include an inclined bottom surface 1311 and an inclined side surface 1312 that continues to the inclined bottom surface 1311. The inclined bottom surface 1311 is a flat surface that forms the bottom surface of the recess, and a game ball is dropped from the entrance 1221 to one end side (the opposite side to the inclined side surface 1312) of the inclined bottom surface 1311.

  The inclined bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward toward the front side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300. That is, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, the recessed depth from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is deeper toward the inclined side surface 1312 side (the distance from the axis of the disk member 1300 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 is It is shortened toward the inclined side surface 1312 side). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the entrance 1221 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 rolls on the inclined bottom surface 1311 toward the inclined side surface 1312 (see FIG. 14). As a result, as will be described later, the position of the center of gravity of the disc member 1300 as a whole is decentered from the axis by the weight of the game ball, and the disc member 1300 is rotated (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

  The inclined side surface 1312 is a flat surface that forms the side surface of the recess, and the game ball stored in the recess is rolled on the inclined side surface 1312 toward the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (FIG. 15A). reference). The inclined side surface 1312 has an angle of 90 degrees or more with the inclined bottom surface 1311 and is erected from the other end side (the front side in the rotational direction of the disk member 1300) that becomes the descending inclined end of the inclined bottom surface 1311. The

  Here, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is the thickness direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13A and FIG. 13 (c) direction) while the left receiving portion 1310L is located in the center, the inclined side surface 1312 is positioned on the front surface F side of the disk member 1300, and the right receiving portion 1310R has the inclined side surface 1312 on the back surface of the disk member 1300. Located on the B side.

  That is, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) enters the ball when the disk member 1300 is rotated in both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R. It is formed so as to be able to pass through a position (facing position) corresponding to the mouth 1221. Therefore, the game ball dropped from the entrance 1221 can be received and stored in the recess.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member 1300 is rotated, the inclined side surface 1312 of the left receiving portion 1310L has a position corresponding to the left groove 1223L and the left outlet port 1222L (facing position), and the inclined side surface of the right receiving portion 1310R. Reference numeral 1312 is formed so as to be able to pass through positions (facing positions) corresponding to the right groove 1223R and the right ball outlet 1222R when the rotating member 1300 is rotated. Therefore, the stored game balls can be discharged to the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R have a recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (a rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312). The dimension is a depth dimension that is at least larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, in the initial stage of receiving a game ball from the entrance 1221, the rotation of the disc member 1300 is suppressed by preventing the game ball bounced off the inclined bottom surface 1311 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. Can proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the dimension of the recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is a depth dimension smaller than 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when two or more game balls are successively entered from the entrance 1221, the second and subsequent game balls are inserted into the entrance 1221 (guide slope) in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotating member 1300. Part 1224).

  The pushing plate 1320 is a plate-like member that pushes the game ball against the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R and pushes it into the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The disk member 1300 is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw. In addition, a storage groove deeper than the thickness dimension of the pressing plate 1320 is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed in the storage groove. Therefore, the push plate 1320 and the head of the fastening screw are not projected from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300.

  Here, since the pushing plate 1320 repeatedly receives a large reaction force when pushing the game ball into the ball outlet, the fastening screw may be broken. In this case, since the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, the reaction force received when the pushing plate 1320 pushes the game ball into the ball outlet is applied to the side surface of the housing groove (the pushing plate on the side surface of the housing groove). 1320 can be supported), and the load applied to the fastening screw can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, breakage of the fastening screw can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed to the disc member 1300 with a fastening screw. However, the fastening with the fastening screw may be omitted. That is, the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, and the opening of the housing groove is closed by the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, so that the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 and the facing wall member 1220 If the gap between the inner peripheral surface is set to be smaller than the thickness of the pushing plate 1320, the pushing plate 1320 can be arranged so that the game ball can be pushed in and cannot fall off. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the assembly process can be simplified by the amount that the fastening screw can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost.

  The one-way clutch 1330 is a part for regulating the rotation direction of the disk member 1300, and when viewed from the front (front F view) of the disk member 1300 shown in FIG. While turning in the right direction is allowed, turning in the opposite direction (FIG. 13B counterclockwise (left rotation)) is restricted.

  That is, the disk member 1300 rotates in the direction in which the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving part 1310L and the right receiving part 1310R is inclined downward (that is, in the direction in which the disk member 1300 should rotate depending on the weight of the game ball). Rotation) is allowed, and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  Here, for example, immediately after the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (before the rolling of the game ball falling on the inclined bottom surface 1311 is started, FIG. When a vibration is input to the sorting apparatus 1000 due to a disturbance such as a player hitting the glass unit 16 in a)), the disc member 1300 is opposite to the direction in which the disk member 1300 should originally rotate. There is a risk of turning in the direction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch 1330, even if it is affected by disturbances such as vibrations, it is in a direction opposite to the direction in which it should originally rotate. It is possible to avoid the rotation of the disk member 1300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 18, the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 1000 will be described. 14, FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are schematic partial sectional views of the sorting apparatus 1000 illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the left receiving portion 1310L from the left outlet 1222L. These are the partial cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the distribution apparatus 1000 which illustrate the transition of the operation | movement which drains the game ball received by the right receiving part 1310R from the right discharge port 1222R.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), when a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the game ball is received by the left receiving portion 1310L, The sphere falls from the entrance 1221 to one end side (left side in FIG. 14A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) is directed downward toward the other end side (inclined side surface 1312 side) by the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 14B). Thus, since the bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward and the game ball rolls along the downward inclination direction, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the entire disc member 1300 including the game ball can be increased accordingly. it can. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly.

  In addition, for example, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may not be started while the game ball is rolling toward the inclined side surface 1312 due to resistance such as biting of a foreign object. In addition, the game ball rolling on the bottom surface 1311 can be made to collide with the inclined side surface 1312, and an impact force can be applied to the disc member 1300 by the collision of the game ball with the inclined side surface 1312. Therefore, it is possible to provide a trigger (for example, removal of foreign matter by impact force) for the disk member 1300 to start the rotation operation. In particular, since the direction in which the impact force acts coincides with the direction in which the disc member 1300 should originally rotate, it is possible to effectively provide a trigger for the disc member 1300 to start the rotation operation.

  Here, the game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221 in an unstable state (for example, a falling state where the falling direction is not constant and the side wall repeatedly collides), and the entrance For example, when the game ball collides with the pushing plate 1320 and then collides with the side surface opposite to the inclined side surface 1312 (the left side surface in FIG. 14A), the impact force at the time of the collision causes the left Depending on the weight of the game ball stored in the receiving portion 1310L, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may start in a direction opposite to the original direction to be rotated (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 1230 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) via the one-way clutch 1330, so that the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L is inclined downward. Only the rotation in the direction (that is, the original direction to be rotated depending on the weight of the game ball) is allowed, and the rotation in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A) can be restricted. it can.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14B, the inclined side surface 1312 has an inclination (ascending inclination) that rises with increasing distance from the bottom surface 1311. When the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started, the disk As the member 1300 rotates, the tilt angle of the rising slope is gradually reduced, and after reaching the horizontal level, the slope is lowered (falling slope) as it moves away from the bottom surface 1311. Therefore, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination toward the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220).

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the game ball reaches the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by rolling on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination. In this case, the left groove 1223L provided in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 extends along the movement locus of the left receiving portion 1310L (inclined side surface 1312), so that the disk member 1300 rotates. In this case, a state where a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 is received in the left groove 1223L can be formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), 15 (b) and 16 (a), when the rotation of the disk member 1300 is further advanced, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the inclined side surface 1312 is further increased. Thus, the game ball is moved toward the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by its own weight and the centrifugal force that acts in accordance with the rotation of the disk member 1300. As a result, the disc member 1300 is rotated while maintaining a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L.

  Thus, when the disc member 1300 rotates, the disc member 1300 can be connected to the facing wall member 1220 (left groove 1223L) via the game ball. Therefore, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300 using the resistance when the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L. As a result, the disk member 1300 moves in the rotation direction. It can suppress having an excessive inertia force (rotation speed). Therefore, after that, when the game ball is discharged to the left outlet 1222L (see FIG. 16B), the ball can be reliably discharged.

  A push plate 1320 is installed in the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L. The push plate 1320 rotates the disc member 1300 in a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223. In this case, the disc member 1300 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball behind the game ball. Therefore, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball can be transmitted to the disk member 1300 via the pushing plate 1320, and as a result, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300.

  As described above, if a state in which a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, a state protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L) can be formed (the protruding amount) ), The game ball is brought close to the left ball exit 1222L, and can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. Therefore, the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). It can be done reliably.

  Since the recess depth of the left groove 1223L increases (deeply) toward the left outlet 1222L, the resistance of the game ball due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is reduced. As it approaches the left vent hole 1222L (that is, the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds), it can be gradually increased. Therefore, the inertia force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In addition, since the amount of a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L can be gradually increased in the left groove 1223L (that is, the amount by which the game ball protrudes from the left receiving portion 1310L), the disc member 1300 can be increased. With this rotation, the game ball can be moved outward in the radial direction (that is, the direction accepted by the left groove 1223L). Due to this outward movement in the radial direction, the game ball can have an inertial force in the direction of entering the left ball exit 1222L, so that the game ball can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the mouth 1222L (see FIG. 16B).

  Here, the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L after the disc member 1300 is rotated by a predetermined angle (see FIGS. 12 and 15A). As a result, the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the disk member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14) is the circle. Where there is no momentum in the rotation of the plate member 1300, resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is not generated, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started and advanced smoothly and quickly. be able to. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds (the middle stage shown in FIG. 15A and the latter stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B), the inertial force of the disk member 1300 is obtained. As the momentum gradually increases and the momentum increases, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed by utilizing the resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L.

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16A, a facing magnet 1226 is disposed in the vicinity of the terminal end of the left groove 1223L. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed along the extending direction of the left groove 1223L (that is, the movement trajectory in which the game ball accommodated in the left receiving portion 1222L moves as the disc member 1300 rotates). When the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L as the disc member 1300 rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. As a result, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can act as a rotational resistance (braking force) on the disc member 1300 via the game ball, and the disc member 1300 can be decelerated. As a result, it is ensured that the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). Can be done.

  Further, by providing the facing magnet 1226 in the vicinity of the terminal end of the left groove 1223L in this way, it is possible to effectively brake the disk member 1300 using magnetic force (apply rotation resistance). That is, as described above, in the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 and the disc member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14), the rotation has momentum. However, at that stage, no magnetic force (a force that attracts the game ball) is generated, and the rotating operation of the disc member 1300 can be started and advanced smoothly and quickly. On the other hand, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 increases to the maximum at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 progresses (particularly, the later stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B). When the momentum increases, the inertial force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be effectively suppressed by using magnetic force (force to attract the game ball).

  In this case, since the plurality of facing-side magnets 1226 are arranged along the left groove 1223L (that is, along the circumferential direction of the disk member 1300), when the disk member 1300 rotates, The rotation resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member 1300 by using the magnetic forces of the plurality of facing magnets 1226, respectively. That is, when a turning resistance is suddenly applied to the disc member 1300, the disc member 1300 is suddenly braked, and the turning operation of the disc member 1300 becomes unstable. The reception by the unit 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the ball discharge of the game ball to the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B) are inhibited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member 1300 as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated and the rotation operation of the disk member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R and to discharge the game ball to the left exit 1222L.

  Further, the closer the plurality of facing magnets 1226 are to the left ball exit port 1222L, the smaller the distance from the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L to the outer side in the radial direction of the disk member 1300, that is, the left ball exit port 1222L. Since the closer to the left, the closer to the game ball that rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 is applied to the left ball exit 1222L. The closer it is, the larger it can be. That is, the rotational resistance applied to the disk member 1300 can be gradually increased, and the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated without sudden braking. Therefore, similarly to the above-described case, the rotation operation of the disc member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R and the left exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the left receiving part 1310L of the disc member 1300 reaches the left ball outlet 1222L of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball stored in the left receiving part 1310L By entering the mouth 1222L and passing through the left ball outlet 1222L, the ball is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the pushing plate 1320 provided on the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L is formed so as to be able to contact the game ball from the rear in the rotational direction of the disc member 1300. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged to the left ball outlet 1222L, the pushing plate 1320 contacts the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disc member 1300, thereby pushing the game ball into the left ball outlet 1222L ( Push in).

  In this case, the position of the opening edge on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is closer to the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 than the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L. Arranged. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L), while the left receiving portion 1310L is left When reaching the ball outlet 1222L, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L (the side facing the terminal end of the left groove 1223L, the left side in FIG. 16B). Thereby, not only can the game ball be reliably discharged to the left discharge port 1222L, but also the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 of the left groove 1223L is the maximum depth dimension at the end communicating with the left outlet 1222L, but in the present embodiment, this maximum depth The depth dimension is approximately ¼ of the diameter of the game ball. The maximum recess depth is preferably ¼ or more of the diameter of the game ball, and more preferably ３ or more. This is because the game ball can be reliably brought into contact with the opening edge of the left outlet 1222L and can be prevented from being bounced back into the left receiving portion 1310L.

  Further, the left vent hole 1222L is formed as a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 16B) of the facing wall member 1220 toward the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 16B). Is done. That is, in the left vent hole 1222L, the inner peripheral surface on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member 1300 in the rotational direction. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 can smoothly enter the left ball discharge port 1222L, and the exit (see FIG. ).

  Note that the left vent hole 122L is disposed to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the opening of the left receiving portion 1310L) and is disposed at the lowermost portion in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L to the left discharge port 1222L, the ball can be discharged using the centrifugal force associated with the rotation of the disk member 1300, and the game ball is moved downward (gravity to the game ball). In the direction of the action). That is, when a ball is thrown, the game ball's own weight (gravity) acts in a direction that causes the game ball to enter the left ball outlet 1222L, so that it is difficult to bite the game ball and the ball can be discharged reliably. .

  Here, the facing wall member 1220 is disposed at a position where the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the inlet 1221 (see FIGS. 9 to 12), Since the plate member 1300 is disposed at a position where the right receiving portion 1310R is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received. The timing received by one of the portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R can be matched with the timing at which the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R discharges the game ball to the left ball outlet 1222L or the right ball outlet 1222R.

  That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, in a state where the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned in the same phase as the left exit port 1222L, as shown in FIG. 17A, the right receiving portion 1310R is 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is discharged to the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R. The next game ball can be received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R at the time or after the ball is discharged, and the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is left exit port 1222L Alternatively, it is not necessary to receive the next game ball in the middle of carrying toward the right ball outlet 1222R (that is, in a state where the disk member 1300 is rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  As described above, when the game ball is brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped (see FIG. 16B), the disk member 1300 is stopped. The right receiving portion 1310R faces the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) (see FIG. 17A). Therefore, in this case, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221, the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball is received from the entrance 1221 to the right. It is dropped to one end side (left side in FIG. 17A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the portion 1310R.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) faces the other end side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) on the bottom surface 1311 due to the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L and the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R are inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member 1300, the left receiving portion 1310L has received the same inclination direction. A rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and a rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310R. Can be in the same direction. That is, the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where the disc member 1300 rotates alternately in one direction and the other direction according to the receiving portion (left receiving portion 1310L or right receiving portion 1310R) that receives the gaming ball, the gaming ball is positioned at two positions. The operation of distributing to (the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R) can be stably executed.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the operation after the game ball rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along its descending inclination and reaches the inner peripheral surface (right groove 1223R) of the facing wall member 1220 ( The action / effect is the same as that when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball (see FIGS. 14 to 16), and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the sorting apparatus 1000, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, since the sorting apparatus 1000 has a structure using a disk member 1300 formed in a disk shape, a planar arrangement is possible. Therefore, the distribution device 1000 is disposed even in a region where the distance between the game board 13 (base plate 60) and the glass unit 16 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is relatively narrow. Can do.

  Next, a distribution device 2000 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped by the game ball being brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R (FIG. 16 ( b), the rotation of the disc member 1300 of the second embodiment is stopped by being braked by the braking member 2240. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19, the front member 2200 according to the second embodiment has recesses 2230 that are recessed spaces provided in two locations, and the brake member 2240 can operate in the recessed spaces of the respective storage portions 2230. Respectively. Here, with reference to FIG.20 and FIG.21, the detailed structure of the accommodating part 2230 and the braking member 2240 is demonstrated.

  20A is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200, and FIG. 20B is a plan view of the front member 2200 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20A. As shown in FIG. 20, the storage portion 2230 includes an operation recess 2231 and a shaft support recess 2232 connected to the operation recess 2231.

  The operation recess 2231 is a recess for accommodating the protruding piece 2342 and the facing piece 2243 of the braking member 2240 so as to be operable (swingable), and the left groove 1223L and the left groove 1223L sandwiching the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R. Recessed at two locations on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on the opposite side of the right groove 1223R. The operation recess 2231 has one surface side (upper side in FIG. 20 (a)) opened to the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and one end side (right side in FIG. 20 (a)) is the left or right outlet port. It communicates with 1222R.

  The shaft support recess 2232 is a recess for housing (supporting) the shaft portion 2241 of the braking member 2240 so that the shaft portion 2241 can be operated (turned). It is recessed with a recess depth shallower than 2231. The shaft support recess 2232 is opened on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on one side (upper side in FIG. 20A).

  FIG. 21A is a side view of the braking member 2240, and FIG. 21B is a top view of the braking member 2240 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the braking member 2240 includes a columnar shaft portion 2241, a protruding piece 2242 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241, and a direction opposite to the extending direction of the protruding piece 2242. A facing piece 2243 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241 and an elastic member 2244 disposed at the extending tip of the facing piece 2243 are formed integrally from a resin material.

  The shaft portion 2241 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the shaft-supporting concave portion 2232 of the storage portion 2230. The protruding piece 2242 is a portion that protrudes to the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R through the opening on one end side of the operation recess 2231. By the game ball passing through the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R Pushed down.

  The facing piece 2243 is a part whose front end is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and is pushed up toward the disk member 1300 around the shaft portion 2241 when the protruding piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball. It is done. The elastic member 2244 is made of a rubber-like elastic body, and is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 when the facing piece 2243 is pushed up.

  The protruding piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the side. The protruding direction of the projecting piece 2242 is a direction in which the protruding piece 2242 is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft portion 2241 (that is, in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, see FIG. 22A).

  The total length of the facing piece 2243 is larger (longer) than the total length of the protruding piece 2242, and the width dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 21B) is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Is done. That is, the facing piece 2243 is heavier than the protruding piece 2242 even if the weight excluding the elastic member 2244 is used. Therefore, the barycentric position of the braking member 2240 is located closer to the facing piece 2243 than the shaft portion 2241.

  The facing piece 2243 is formed to be bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the side, and is easily elastically deformed in the direction of increasing the bending angle. In other words, as described above, the facing piece 2243 is spaced away from or in the direction of approaching the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 even when the width dimension is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Elastic deformation in the direction (vertical direction in FIG. 22B) is ensured.

  With reference to FIG. 22, the braking operation of the disk member 1300 by the braking member 2240 will be described. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 2000. FIG. 22A shows a state before the protruding piece 2242 of the braking member 2240 is pushed down by the game ball, and FIG. 22B shows the brake member by the game ball. The state after the projecting piece 2242 of 2240 is pushed down is shown respectively.

  The brake member 2240 disposed on the left ball outlet 1222L side and the storage portion 2230 that stores the brake member 2240, and the brake member 2240 disposed on the right ball outlet 1222R side and the housing that stores the brake member 2240. Since the parts 2230 have the same configuration, only the configuration on the right exit port 1222R side will be described here, and the description on the configuration on the left exit port 1222L side will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the braking member 2240, in the non-operating state (initial state), the protruding piece 2242 protrudes into the right outlet port 1222R, and the facing piece 2243 is the disc member 1300. It is arrange | positioned facing the outer peripheral surface of this.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the game ball drained from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 passes through the right drain port 1310R of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball causes the braking member 2240. The projecting piece 2242 is pushed down in the passing direction, and the braking member 2240 is rotated around the shaft portion 2241 to push up the facing piece 2243. Thereby, the extended tip of the pushed-up facing piece 2243 can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 via the elastic member 2244, and the disc member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) can be reliably received by the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 14A).

  As described above, the braking member 2240 is operated using the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, and the operation of bringing the facing piece 2243 into contact with the disk member 1300 can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Power (actuator) and control for operation can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, even when the game ball passes through the right ball outlet 1222R, the state in which the facing piece 2243 (elastic member 2244) of the braking member 2240 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is maintained. Subsequent rotation of the member 1300 is hindered. Therefore, after the game ball has passed, it is necessary to quickly return the braking member 2240 to the non-operating state (initial state). On the other hand, if power is used for the return operation, as described above, the braking operation is mechanically performed, so that control and sensors are unnecessary, and the significance of reducing the product cost is lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the gravity center position of the braking member 2240 is located on the facing piece 2243 side (left side in FIG. 22A) with respect to the shaft portion 2241 as described above. Therefore, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down and the facing piece 2243 is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when the braking member 2240 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 22 (b) clockwise) around the shaft portion 2241). ), The braking member 2240 is rotated in the other direction (FIG. 22 (b) counterclockwise) by utilizing its own weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft portion 2241). ) To the non-operating state (initial state) shown in FIG. Therefore, power for the return operation can be made unnecessary.

  Since the projecting piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 toward the extended distal end side (right side in FIG. 22 (a)), the projecting piece 2242 is discharged to the right discharge port 1222R. It is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball from being obstructed by the protruding piece 2242 and to smoothly push down the protruding piece 2242 by the passing game ball.

  The facing piece 2243 is provided with an elastic member 2244 at its extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), so that the frictional force with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is reduced. It is possible to ensure the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member 1300.

  In this manner, the use of the elastic member 2244 can reduce the product cost. That is, for example, a structure in which the disc member 1300 is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece 2243 to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is conceivable. In this embodiment, since it is not necessary to form uneven shapes on the disc member 1300 and the braking member 2240, the shape of the parts can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, the facing piece 2243 is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and an elastic member 2244 is disposed at the extending tip thereof, so that the facing piece 2243 is formed. When the extending tip (elastic member 2244) is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 130, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member 1300, the braking member 2240, and the like are caused by elastic deformation of the facing piece 2243 itself and It can be absorbed by elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244.

  Similarly, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, the variation in the pushed position and the direction in which the game ball passes is determined not only by the elastic deformation of the projecting piece 2242 but also by the facing piece. Since it can also be absorbed by the elastic deformation of 2243, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced back to the protruding piece 2242 and to pass it reliably.

  When the facing piece 2243 is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300, the abutment force between them (ie, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disc member 1300) is used as the protruding piece 2242. In addition to the elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244, the elastic deformation of the facing piece can be used gradually so that the rotational movement of the disk member 1300 can be prevented from changing suddenly.

  The assembling of the sorting apparatus 2000 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that a step of storing the braking member 2240 in the storage portion 2230 of the front member 2200 is added, and the opening side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 2200 The disc member 1300 is inserted and the substrate member 1100 is fastened and fixed.

  In other words, the storage portion 2230 is recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), and the opening of the concave space of the storage portion 2230 has an opening of the disk member 1300. The outer peripheral surfaces are confronted. Therefore, the opening of the recessed portion space of the storage portion 2230 can be closed by the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the braking member 2240 stored in the storage portion 2230 can be connected to the recessed space of the storage portion 2230 and the outer periphery of the disk member 1300. It can be operatively held between the surfaces. As a result, a member that holds the braking member 2240 (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as the disk member 1300, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for such holding. Can be reduced.

  Next, a distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the distribution device 3000 that distributes the game balls by rotating the disk member 1300 in one direction has been described. However, the distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment alternates in one direction and the other direction. Rotate to distribute game balls. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 3000 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 3000 will be described. The distribution device 3000 is provided with a support plate member 3300 therein. The support plate member 3300 is pivotally supported between a first angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 23A or a second angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 23A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23B, the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23 (b), the support plate member 3300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 23 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, and is alternately disposed at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 3300 is provided with a weight member 3400 so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture in which the center plate 3330 faces upward. That is, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When arranged at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the weight member 3400 is arranged on the descending inclination side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A (shown by a broken line in FIG. 23B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When the weight member 3400 is disposed at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the weight member 3400 is disposed on the descending inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23B (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 3000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  24A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 3000, and FIG. 24B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 3000. As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the sorting device 3000 is disposed on the substrate member 3100 (see FIG. 25) and the front side of the substrate member 3100 (the front side in FIG. 24). Front plate member 3200 (see FIG. 26), a support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 (internal space), and the support plate member A weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) to be attached to 3300, and the entered game ball is in two positions, a first position and a second position (in this embodiment, a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b). ) Alternately (see FIG. 23).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100, the front member 3200, the support plate member 3300, and the weight member 3400 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a front view of the substrate member 3100, and FIG. 25B is a side view of the substrate member 3100 as seen in the direction of the arrow XXVb in FIG. In FIG. 25A, the front member 3200 is schematically shown using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 3100.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the board member 3100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 3100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through these insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four central portions of the substrate member 3100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 3100 (FIG. 25A, the back side of the paper), and the fastening screw causes the front side of the board member 3100 (the front side of the paper side of FIG. 25A). ) And the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed.

  A shaft hole 3130 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the board member 3100, and an opening serving as an outlet for a game ball is provided below the center of the board member 3100. A left communication hole 3120L and a right communication hole 3120R are formed. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted through the shaft hole 3130.

  The left communication hole 3120L and the right communication hole 3120R are openings for allowing the game balls discharged from the support plate member 3300 to win the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b (see FIG. 23). In the assembled state in which the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed to the front member 3200, the front member 3200 is disposed at the downstream end of the guide passage (see FIG. 26) formed by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200.

  Next, the overall configuration of the front member 3200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26A is a rear view of the front member 3200, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the front member 3200 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the front member 3200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c that are erected on the back side of the front plate 1210 (the front side of FIG. 26 (a)). These are integrally formed from a resin material.

  A shaft hole 3230 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the front plate member 1210. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted into the shaft hole 3230. The wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c are members that surround the periphery of the support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) and form a guide path for game balls distributed by the support plate member 3300.

  In the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c, the opening on the front side (FIG. 26 (a), the back side of the paper) of the internal space surrounded by them is sealed by the front plate member 1210, and the back side (FIG. 26 (a) the front side of the paper). Side) opening is formed. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 3100 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

  That is, the assembling of the sorting device 3000 is performed by installing the support plate member 3300 from the opening on the back side of the internal space surrounded by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200, and setting the rotation shaft 3320 of the support plate member 3300. The substrate member 3100 is fastened and fixed while being inserted through the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, respectively. As a result, the support plate member 3300 can be installed inside the sorting device 3000 so as to be rotatable and not dropout. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The wall member 3220a is formed in an inverted U shape in a rear view, and the wall member 3220b is formed in a straight line in a rear view extending vertically on the inner side of the wall member 3220a. That is, the wall member 3220b is opposed to a linear part in back view extending in the vertical direction (FIG. 26 (a) vertical direction) of the wall member 3220a with a space through which one game ball can pass. Arranged.

  The upper ends of the straight portions of the wall member 3220b as viewed from the back are bent inwardly (in directions close to each other). The linear portion that is bent and extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 26A, left-right direction) abuts on the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R of the support plate member 3300, and rotates the support plate member 3300. It functions as a part that regulates the moving angle.

  The wall member 3220c is formed by connecting the lower ends of linear portions in back view extending in the vertical direction of the wall members 3220a and 3220b. As a result, the guide passage through which the game ball passes is defined, and the end of the guide passage is formed.

  In the wall member 3220a, a ball entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225 are formed. Since these are the same structures as each site | part 1221,1224,1225 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 3300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 3300, and FIG. 27 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 3300 in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 28 is a bottom view of the support plate member 3300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C, the support plate member 3300 includes a cylindrical central cylindrical portion 3310 and an axial rotation shaft 3320 protruding from both end surfaces of the central cylindrical portion 3310. A central plate 3330 extending upward from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (upper side in FIG. 27A), and left and right from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (left and right sides in FIG. 27A). Left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R extending toward the bottom, and guide portion 3350 disposed on the bottom surface side (the lower side in FIG. 27A) of left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R. These are integrally formed from a resin material. However, the rotation shaft 3320 is made of a metal material and is fitted into the central cylindrical portion 3310.

  The outer cylindrical dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 is made larger than the inner diameters of the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, and the length dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 27B) is determined by the distribution device 3000. The dimension is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the substrate member 3100 and the back surface of the front plate member 1220 of the front member 3200 in the assembled state. Therefore, in the assembled state of the sorting device 3000 in which the rotation shaft 3320 is inserted into the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, the support plate member 3300 cannot be removed and can be rotated between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 facing each other. Decorated.

  The central plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R are portions formed in a flat plate shape, and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R extend vertically with respect to the central plate 3330. A space between the central plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340 or a space between the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340 is a part that receives the game ball that has entered the sorting device 3000.

  The guide portion 3350 is a portion for guiding the weight member 3400 according to the inclined state of the support plate member 3300, and is formed in a bar shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, a linear portion extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 27 (a) left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and both ends of the linear portions are connected. And a portion connected to the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. The weight member 3400 is moved to the downward inclined side of the support plate member 3300 by sliding on a linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 (see FIG. 29).

  The linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction. Therefore, the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced, and sliding resistance can be suppressed. Therefore, the weight member 3400 can be reliably moved along the descending slope of the guide portion 3350 without stopping the weight member 3340 in the middle, and the weight member 3400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400 (FIG. 29). (See (a) or FIG. 29 (d)).

  Next, the overall configuration of the weight member 3400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a front view of the weight member 3400, and FIG. 28B is a side view of the weight member 3400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the weight member 3400 is a member that is attached to the guide portion 3350 of the support plate member 3300 and functions as a weight, and is an end material (made of a metal material). For example, it is formed in an annular shape by winding a piano wire. Therefore, since the opening can be formed in a part of the weight member 3400 by elastic deformation, the guide member 3350 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the weight member 3400 through the opening. Therefore, the mounting work can be facilitated and the number of assembly steps can be reduced.

  In addition, when the weight member 3400 is formed by winding a material with ends, the end portions are overlapped in a front view. That is, the end material has a length of 180 degrees or more along the circumferential direction. As described above, the weight member 3400 is formed by overlapping the end portions thereof, so that even if the weight of the weight member 3400 is increased, the weight member 3400 is separated from the guide portion 3350. It can suppress falling off.

  Further, the material of the weight member 3400 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the material. Therefore, since the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, the weight member 3400 can be reliably and rapidly moved as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the operation of distributing the game balls and the operation of the weight member 3400 by the distribution device 3000 will be described. FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are front views of the support plate member 3300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 3300 that receives an incoming game ball and discharges the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the support plate member 3300 is positioned such that the left receiving plate 3340L side is positioned downward and receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. At the first angle position, the left receiving plate 3340L is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise when the rotation shaft 3320 is the rotation center (FIG. 29). (B) Counterclockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  As shown in FIG. 29B and FIG. 29C, when the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, the weight of the game ball The support plate member 3300 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction) about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the game balls received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R are moved to the second start port 63b (FIG. 23 ( b), the support plate member 3300 is in a posture to receive the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. At the second angle position, the right receiving plate 3340R is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 with the rotation shaft 3320 as the center of rotation is viewed clockwise (FIG. 29 ( d) The clockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  When the next game ball is entered in the state where the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29D, the door receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In both cases, the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the opposite side to that described above, whereby the game ball is discharged to the second starting port 63a (see FIG. 23A).

  Thus, for example, when the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIGS. 29A and 29B), By turning the game ball from the first angle position to the second angle position using the weight of the game ball (FIGS. 29C and 29D), the game ball is moved to the second start port 63b. To throw a ball. At the same time, the support plate member 3300 is arranged in a posture (second angular position) where the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. Accordingly, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in the present embodiment, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  However, the center plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R receive the game balls, the direction in which the game balls drop, or the direction in which the game balls are discharged from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, etc. Depending on the state of the variation and the timing at which disturbances such as vibrations input from the outside to the sorting device 3000 are transmitted to the support plate member 3300, there are variations, for example, as shown in FIG. After the game ball is received at one angular position and the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d) and the game ball is discharged, it is maintained at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d). The support plate member 3300 to be returned may return to the first angular position shown in FIG. In this case, the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R in the same manner as the previous game ball, and the operations from FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (d) are repeated. The game balls are continuously discharged to the second start port 63b. For this reason, the game balls cannot be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in this embodiment, the second start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  On the other hand, the distribution device 3000 includes a guide unit 3350 and a weight member 3400 that is guided and moved by the guide unit 3350. For example, in the second angular position shown in FIG. Since the member 3400 is moved to the downward inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), the posture of the support plate member 3300 is supposed to be originally (FIG. 29 (d) using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400. ) Second angular position).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 3400 is positioned at the descending inclined end (the left receiving plate 3340L side) of the guide portion 3350, so that the left receiving plate The 3340L side is made heavy, and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C, the support plate member 3300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 rotates by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction), the guide portion 3350 is also rotated in the same direction, and the guide portion 3350 is lowered toward the right receiving plate 3340R. By being inclined, the weight member 3400 is moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion 3350.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 3400 reaches the descending inclined end of the guide portion 3350. As a result, the center of gravity position as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 3400 (the lower right receiving plate 3340R side is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d), the support plate member 3300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 29 (d)), and the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (a). Since it can suppress returning to 1 angular position, this support plate member 3300 can be maintained at a 2nd angular position.

  In the present embodiment, since the support plate member 3300 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 3400 is made of a metal material, a change in the center of gravity position due to the movement of the weight member 3400 can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to reliably exhibit the effect of maintaining the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, a support plate member 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the portion for guiding the weight member 3400 of the guide portion 3350 is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed in a curved shape in a circular arc when viewed from the front. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 30A is a front view of the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 30B is a front view of the support plate member 4300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 30B, for the purpose of comparison, the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment is illustrated using a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed to be curved in a front view arc shape concentric with the rotation shaft 3320, and the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. It is arranged. In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 4350 is circular in cross section similarly to the guide part 3350 in 3rd Embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b), according to the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, when the support plate member 4300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 320, the gradient on the ascending inclination side is increased. Can be great. That is, in the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment, the weight member 3400 that is slidably moved by the guide direction (that is, gravity (self-weight) of the weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) at the position P1 on the ascending inclination side is the guide part 3350. Is the extending direction of the linear portion of the guide portion 3350.

  On the other hand, in the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment, the guide direction of the weight member 3400 at the position P2 on the ascending slope side is the tangential direction of the guide portion 4350, so that the angle of the descending slope is increased (more Can be directed downward). Therefore, the movement of the weight member 3400, which is positioned on the rising inclination side (position P2) of the guide portion 4350 with the rotation of the support plate member 4300, is compared with the guide portion 3350 of the third embodiment. , It can be performed more reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the annular weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) slides on the rod-shaped guide portions 3350 and 4350, the friction resistance is large, and thus the weight that is positioned on the ascending slope side (positions P1 and P2). There is a possibility that the movement of the member 3400 may not start (that is, the static friction coefficient is larger than the dynamic friction coefficient), and the configuration in which the guide portion 4350 is curved in a circular arc when viewed from the front is particularly effective for such a configuration.

  Next, a support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 3rd Embodiment, although the part which guides the weight member 3400 of the guide part 3350 was formed in linear form from the start end to the terminal end, the weight member 3400 was added to the guide part 5350 of 5th Embodiment. A depression (depression 5350a) is formed in a part of the guided portion. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31A is a front view of the support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a front view of the support plate member 5300 arranged at the second angular position. FIG. 31B shows the support plate member 5300 in a state where the weight member 3400 is attached to the guide portion 5350.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 31A left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 31 (a)) of the linear portion to be provided, recessed portions 5350a that are recessed downward are formed.

  The hollow portion 5350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 31 (a)). In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 5350 is set to the same cross-sectional shape as a whole including the hollow part 5350a, and is circular in cross section like the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), since the recessed portions 5350a are formed at both ends of the guide portion 5350, the guide plate 5300 is rotated with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. When the weight member 3400 moves toward one end side (the right side in FIG. 31 (b)) along the downward inclination of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is moved to the recess portion 5350a. Can be fitted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from bouncing back to the rising slope side (left side in FIG. 31B).

  That is, like the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), when the entire portion that guides the weight member 3400 is formed in a straight line from the start end to the end, it follows the descending slope of the guide portion 3350. When the weight member 3400 is slid vigorously to the end and is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end (right end in FIG. 29 (d)), there is nothing that hinders the movement of the bounced weight member 3400. The member 3400 may be bounced back to the start end (left end in FIG. 29 (d)). In that case, with the movement of the weight member 3400, the support plate member 3300 is rotated in the opposite direction, and cannot be maintained in a desired posture (first angular position or second angular position). .

  On the other hand, in the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment, since the recessed portion 5350a is formed at the terminal end (right end in FIG. 31B) of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is formed along the descending inclination of the guide portion 5350. Even if it is slid swiftly to the end, the weight member 3400 is fitted into the recess 5350a and collides with the end (the right end in FIG. 31 (b)), so it is rebounded in the reverse direction at the end. However, the movement of the weight member 3400 in the rebound direction can be inhibited by the upward inclination of the recess 5350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 31 (b)), and the support plate member 5300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment will be described. In 3rd Embodiment, although the case where the weight member 3400 was formed from the raw material of a cross-section circular strip | line body was demonstrated, the weight members 6400 and 7400 of 6th Embodiment and 7th Embodiment are from plate-shaped material. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment is made of a metal material, and a circular plate shape in which a slit extending in the radial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is a member. According to this weight member 6400, since the material has a thickness in the axial direction, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are shifted in the axial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  FIG. 33A is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 33A, the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment is made of a metal material, and a cylindrical member in which a slit extending in the axial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is. According to this weight member 7400, since the material has a thickness in the radial direction, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are displaced in the radial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  According to the weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, for example, the weight member 6400 can be formed in one step by punching a shape including a slit by pressing from a flat plate material, A plurality of weight members 7400 can be formed by rolling a flat material by roll processing, creating a relatively long roll-shaped body, and cutting the roll-shaped body at predetermined lengths. Therefore, these weight members 7400 Manufacturing efficiency can be increased, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Thus, while the weight members 6400 and 7400 are easy to manufacture, the weight members 6400 and 7400 are made of a plate-shaped material, so that it is easy to secure the weight as the weight. Thus, by applying the weight to the support plate member 3300 or the like as a weight, the holding plate member 3300 or the like can be reliably maintained in a posture (first angle position or second angle position) that should be originally.

  Next, a support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In 3rd Embodiment, although the guide part 3350 was penetrated to the cyclic | annular weight member 3400 and the weight member 3400 was slid along the guide part 3350, the weight member 8400 of 8th Embodiment is as follows. Rolled along the guide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 34 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 8300 in the direction of the arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 (c) is a bottom view of the support plate member 8300 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVc in FIG. 34 (a). 35A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 8300 along the line XXXVa-XXXVa in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 35B is a support plate along the line XXXVb-XXXVb in FIG. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of member 8300.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment includes a box body 8350 for housing a weight member 8400 on the bottom side of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the box 8350. A lid body 8360 attached to the opening is disposed, and the weight member 8400 rolls along a path formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 (see FIG. 36).

  The box 8350 is a box-shaped body that is open on one side (the front side in FIG. 34 (a)), the ceiling surface is formed by the central cylindrical portion 3310, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R. The bottom surface is formed in parallel with the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (the left-right direction in FIG. 35A). The side walls (left and right side walls in FIG. 35 (a)) facing each other of the box 8350 are bulged outward in a semicircular cross section, and the bulged portion (meat) Fastened holes 8351 are respectively formed in the thick portions).

  The lid body 8360 is a plate-like body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an insertion hole for inserting the fastening screw 8370 is provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 34 (a) left-right direction). The fastening screw 8370 inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the fastening hole 8351 of the box body 8350, whereby the lid body 8360 is fastened and fixed to the box body 8350, and one side of the box body 8350 (FIG. 34 (a The opening on the front side) is closed by the lid 8360.

  The weight member 8400 is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material, and is housed in a passage formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the rotation shaft 3320. The length of the weight member 8400 in the axial direction is slightly smaller than the facing distance between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360 (the distance in the left-right direction in FIG. 35B). Accordingly, the weight of the weight member 8400 can be secured, and the posture of the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being disturbed in the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being bitten between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360.

  Next, the operation of the weight member 8400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (d) are front views of the support plate member 8300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 8300 that receives a game ball that has been entered and discharges the game ball. Note that the game ball distribution operation is the same as that in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 8400 has a descending inclined end (left receiving plate 3340L) of a passage (hereinafter referred to as “passage”) formed by the box 8350 and the lid 8360. The left support plate 3340L side is made heavy and the support plate member 8300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 36B and 36C, the support plate member 8300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 2369 (b)), the passage is also rotated in the same direction, and the passage is inclined downward toward the right receiving plate 3340R. Thus, the weight member 8400 is rolled along the downward slope of the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 36D, when the support plate member 8300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 8400 reaches the descending inclined end (one of the opposing side walls) of the passage. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 8400 (the right receiving plate 3340R side positioned below is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angle position shown in FIG. 36 (d), the support plate member 8300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 36 (d)), and the second angle position shown in FIG. Since it can suppress returning to 1 angle position, this support plate member 8300 can be maintained in a 2nd angle position.

In the present embodiment, a passage parallel to the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R is formed,
Since the weight member 8400 is formed as a cylindrical body capable of rolling the passage, when the passage is inclined downward with the rotation of the support plate member 8300, the weight is increased along the downward inclination of the passage. The member 8400 can be moved reliably and quickly.

  For example, in the structure in which the annular weight member 3400 moves by sliding the guide portion 3350 as in the case of the third embodiment, since the sliding resistance is large, the movement of the weight member 3400 is not started, or the guide portion The weight member 3400 that moves along the descending slope of 3350 may stop halfway, and the movement speed of the weight member 3400 may not be in time because the movement speed is slow.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the weight member 8400 is formed as a cylindrical body and is configured to roll the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end of the passage, The weight member 8400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 8300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 8400.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the box body 8350 is made of a resin material, the entire support plate member 8300 can be integrally formed, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, its weight can be secured, so that the change in the center of gravity position due to rolling can be increased.

  On the other hand, during the game ball sorting operation by the support plate member 8300 (see FIG. 36), the opposite side walls of the box 8350 (that is, one end side and the other end side of the passage where the weight member 8400 rolls, FIG. a) Since the weight member 8400 repeatedly collides with the left side and the right side, as described above, the box 8350 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, the box The side walls of the 8350 facing each other are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a fastening hole 8351 for fastening the fastening screw 8351 is formed on the side walls of the box 8350 facing each other, and a part of the side wall is partially formed along with the formation of the fastening hole 8351. It bulges outward (thickness). Therefore, a state in which the fastening screw 8370 made of a metal material is embedded in the opposite side walls of the box 8350 can be formed, and a part of the side wall can be partially thickened. The portion where 84000 collides can be reinforced to prevent the side wall from being damaged. In addition, the structure for fastening and fixing the box 8350 and the lid 8360 can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the weight member 84000 collides (the side wall of the box 8350). Since it is not necessary to provide the product, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a support plate member 9300 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the bottom surface of the passage in which the weight member 8400 rolls is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front end to the end, but the weight member 8400 is formed on the bottom surface of the passage in the ninth embodiment. A depression (depression 9350a) is formed in a part of the portion that guides the movement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 37A, the weight member 8400 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the bottom surface of the box 9350 in the ninth embodiment has a horizontal direction parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIG. 37 (a) horizontal direction). At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 37 (a)) of the linear portion extending to the bottom, recessed portions 9350a that are recessed downward are formed. The hollow portion 9350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 37 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), since the recessed portions 9350a are formed at both ends of the box body 9350, the support plate member 9300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as a rotation center. Even if the weight member 8400 rolls vigorously to the end along the descending inclination, the weight member 8400 is fitted into the recess 9350a while the end (see FIG. 37 (b) right end), even if it is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end, it is possible to inhibit the movement of the weight member 8400 in the bounce direction due to the rising inclination of the recess 9350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 8400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 37 (b)), and the support plate member 9300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, a sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position is changed by sliding the weight member 3400 along the guide portion 3350 has been described. In the tenth embodiment, either the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R is used. The position of the center of gravity is changed by hanging one side downward. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 38 (a) shows the operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 38, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 10000 will be described. The sorting device 10000 has a support plate member 10300 disposed therein. The support plate member 10300 is pivotally supported between a first angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 38A or a second angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 38A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B, the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38 (b), the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball and is alternately arranged at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 10300 is provided with a left weight member 10360L and a right weight member 10360R so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture facing right above. That is, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When placed at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the left weight member 10360L hangs down on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and maintains the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When arranged at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the right weight member 10360R is suspended downward (to the right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 10300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 10300 receives the next game ball to be entered at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38B (broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 10000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100 and the support plate member 10300 will be described in order. FIG. 39A is a front view of the substrate member 10100, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the substrate member 10100 in the direction of the arrow XXXIXb in FIG. In FIG. 39A, the front member 3200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 10100.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, the board member 10100 differs from the board member 3100 in the third embodiment only in that an upper protrusion 10141 and a lower protrusion 10142 are added. The configuration is the same. Therefore, only different configurations will be described.

  A pair of upper protrusions 10141 and a pair of lower protrusions 10142 protrude from the periphery of the shaft hole 3130 of the substrate member 10100. The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 are columnar protrusions used when the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and are released from the magnetic attachment (FIGS. 42 and 43). The pair of upper protrusions 10141 are equally disposed on the left and right sides at positions above the shaft hole 3130, and the pair of lower protrusions 10142 are equally disposed on the left and right positions at positions below the shaft hole 3130. The

  The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 located on the left side (left side in FIG. 39A) of the shaft hole 3130 are left-locked when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. The upper projection 10141 and the lower projection 10142 that are provided on the movement trajectory of the piece 10370L and are located to the right of the shaft hole 3130 (right side in FIG. 39A) have the support plate member 10300 that rotates the rotation shaft 3320. It protrudes on the movement trajectory of the left locking piece 10370L when rotated as the center. Therefore, when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320, the left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are locked to the upper protrusion 10141 or the lower protrusion 10142 (FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 10300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. 40 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 10300, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 10300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 42 is a bottom view of the support plate member 10300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLc in FIG. 41A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 10300 along the XLIa-XLIa line of FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B is a view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the first angular position. It is a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports a rotating shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the left receiving plate 3340L, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 10350. A left weight member 10360L and a left locking piece 10370L are fixed to the rotation shaft 10351. Similarly, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the right receiving plate 3340R, and the rotation shaft 10351 pivotally supported by the bearing 10350 includes The right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed.

  The left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are plate-like bodies made of a metal material (magnetic material) and are formed in the same shape. The left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are portions that are locked to the upper protrusion 1141 or the lower protrusion 1142 when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 2210. For example, as shown to Fig.41 (a), it arrange | positions by plane symmetry with the center board 3330 as a symmetry plane.

  Note that the left weight member 10360L and the left locking piece 10370L, and the right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed to the same rotation shaft 10351, respectively, and thus rotate in the same phase together with the rotation shafts 10351. Is moved (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  Magnets 10380 are disposed on the bottom surface of left receiving plate 3340L and the bottom surface of right receiving plate 3340R, respectively. Each of these magnets 10380 magnetizes the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R, thereby maintaining the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R ( 42 and 43).

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the left receiving plate 3340L is disposed at the first angular position below the right receiving plate 3340R, the support plate member 10300 is on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side). The left weight member 10360L located in the vertical direction is suspended vertically, while the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 can be rotated clockwise in FIG. 41 (b) with the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 being eccentric to the left receiving plate 3340L side with respect to the rotation shaft 3320 and the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Since it is suppressed, the first angular position shown in FIG. 41 (b) is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 41B (first angular position), when the next game ball is inserted, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. . As a result, the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 41B around the rotation shaft 3320 by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position (FIG. 38). (Refer to the state of the solid line in (b)).

  At this second angular position, the support plate member 10300 is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 with the left weight member 10360L suspended vertically at the first angular position, while being magnetized to the magnet 10380 at the first angular position. The right weight member 10360R is released from the magnetic attachment and is suspended vertically. Therefore, the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 is decentered toward the right receiving plate 3340R with respect to the rotation shaft 3320, and the rotation of the support plate member 10300 about the rotation shaft 3320 in the counterclockwise direction is suppressed. Therefore, the second angular position is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  In the present embodiment, the magnet 10380 is used to maintain the state in which the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3344R. Compared to the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, the structure can be simplified, and the close state can be maintained and the releasing operation can be performed reliably. Can be improved.

  Further, since the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material), the magnet 10380 may be only the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R. It is necessary to arrange a magnet in Therefore, the number of magnets can be reduced by half compared to the case where the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R are provided with magnets, respectively. Accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

  Furthermore, the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material, so that not only the number of magnets can be reduced, but also the weight as a weight can be increased. In addition, the amount of movement of the center of gravity associated with the rotation of the right weight member 10360R can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 10300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  42 and 43, when the support plate member 10300 is disposed from the first angle position to the second angle position (or vice versa) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, the left weight member The principle that the states of the 10360L and the right weight member 10360R (the suspended state and the magnetically attached state) are alternately switched will be described.

  FIG. 42A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position. FIGS. 42B and 42C are directed from the first angular position to the second angular position. FIG. 42D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the second angular position.

  On the other hand, FIG. 43A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position, and FIGS. 43B and 43C illustrate the first angular position from the second angular position. FIG. 43D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position.

  The principle that the state of the left weight member 10360L is alternately switched in the transition from the first angular position to the second angular position and the transition from the second angular position to the first angular position is that the right weight member 10360R Since the state is alternately switched and is the same as the principle, only the right weight member 10360R will be described, and the description of the left weight member 10360L will be omitted. 42 (b) to 42 (d), the upper protrusion 10141 is not shown, and in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (d), the lower protrusion 10142 is not shown.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 42A to 42D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the first angular position (FIG. 42A) to the second angular position (FIG. 42D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising inclination side, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R. Maintained. In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap between both the upper protrusion 1141 and the lower protrusion 1142.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) about the rotation shaft 3320, the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ2. The right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the lower protrusion 10142. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the lower protrusion 10142, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right locking piece 10370R is pushed upward relatively by the lower protrusion 10142 (in the direction close to the right receiving plate 3340R, the upper side of FIG. 42B), as shown in FIG. 42C. The weight member 10360R is rotated in the direction away from the right receiving plate 3340R (the lower side in FIG. 42B), and the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released as shown in FIG.

  Since the right weight member 10360R is heavier than the right locking piece 10370R, when the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released, the right weight member 10360R hangs vertically around the rotation shaft 10351 as the rotation center. When the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (c) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, and the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ4, the right receiving plate 3340R is disposed at the second angular position. .

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the descending slope side. In this case, the right locking piece 10370 </ b> R is disposed at a position having a gap with the lower protrusion 1142. Therefore, the weight of the right weight member 10360R can be efficiently applied to the right receiving plate 3340R.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 43A to 43D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the second angular position (FIG. 43A) to the first angular position (FIG. 43D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the downward slope side. From this state, the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclined direction (FIG. 43 (a) counterclockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center while the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically. The

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclination direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) about the rotation shaft 3320, and the upward inclination angle reaches an angle θ5. Then, the right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the upper protrusion 10141. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the upper protrusion 10141, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the upward tilt direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right engagement piece 10370R is pushed relatively downward (lower side in FIG. 43 (b)) by the upper protrusion 10141, so that the right weight member 10360R is moved to the right receiving plate as shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is rotated in the direction approaching 3340R (the upper side in FIG. 43 (c)) and is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  In the present embodiment, the right weight member 10360R can be brought close to the magnet 10380 by the right locking piece 10370R coming into contact with the upper protrusion 10141, so that the magnet 10380 can be securely attached to the magnet. Can be done. Therefore, since it is not necessary to increase the magnetic force of the magnet 10380 unnecessarily, the release of the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380 described above (see FIGS. 42B and 42C) can be ensured.

  In the right receiving plate 3340R, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is in close proximity to the right receiving plate 3340R with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center (FIG. 43 (c) counterclockwise). When the rising inclination angle reaches the angle θ1, it is arranged at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (d), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising slope side, the right weight member 10360R is maintained in the state of being close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380. . In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap with the upper protrusion 1141. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right locking piece 10370R from coming into contact with the upper protrusion 1141 due to the influence of disturbance or the like and inadvertently releasing the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R by the magnet 10380.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the support plate member 10300 includes the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 1036OR that are pivotably suspended by the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the left weight member 10360L. The left inclined piece 10370L and the right inclined piece 10370R connected to the right weight member 1036OR are provided, and when the support plate member 10300 is arranged up to the first angular position or the second angular position, it is arranged on the upward inclined side. The left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R, while the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR arranged on the descending slope side is a magnet. The magnetic attachment by 10380 is released, and the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3 It can be suspended vertically from the 40R. Thereby, the gravity center position of the support plate member 10300 can be moved, and the support plate member 10300 can be maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  For example, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380. At the same time, the left weight member 10360L located on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side) is suspended vertically, so that the position of the center of gravity as a whole is changed to the left receiving plate 3340L side (that is, located on the descending slope side). The left support plate 3340L side can be made heavier). As a result, it is possible to suppress the support plate member 10300 from rotating back in the reverse direction and back to the second angular position, and maintain the first angular position. The same applies to the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position.

  Next, the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the left weight member 10360L and the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the right weight member 10360R are individually provided. In the eleventh embodiment, 1 The magnet 10380 is configured to be used for both the magnetic attachment of the left weight member 10360L and the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  44 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 arranged at the first angular position, and FIG. c) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 disposed at the second angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with one magnet 10380 on the bottom surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310. Further, the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R are made larger in length than the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R in the tenth embodiment.

  That is, in the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R, the length dimension from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip (lower end in FIG. 44 (a)) is made larger than the linear distance from the rotation shaft 10351 to the magnet 10380. . Therefore, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the right weight member 11360R can be magnetized to the magnet 10380, while at the second angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (c). The left weight member 11360L can be magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, one magnet 1038 is also used as a magnet for magnetizing the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R and maintaining them in a state in proximity to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R. To do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. Further, by increasing the lengths of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R in this way, the amount of movement of the center of gravity position accompanying the displacement of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R can be further increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 11300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  A pachinko machine may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments. For example, it is exemplified that the pachinko machine is configured by combining the sorting apparatus 1000 in the first embodiment and the sorting apparatus 3000 in the third embodiment (that is, both are arranged on the game board 13). .

  In each said embodiment, the case where the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b are arrange | positioned in the distribution destination (1st position and 2nd position) of the game ball by each distribution apparatus 1000-10000 as an example. Although described, what is disposed at the first position and the second position is not limited to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, and may have any other configuration. That is, there is no limitation on the type of winning prize. Further, the components disposed at the first position and the second position do not need to have a structure in which a game ball such as a prize opening enters. For example, a nail or a windmill may be used. Also, nothing may be provided. In other words, the first position and the second position specify the position in the game area, and the configuration existing at the position is not limited.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the object on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 disposed on the facing wall member 1220 is applied is a game ball, but instead or in addition to this, Then, a magnet may be disposed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 may be applied to this magnet. The magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can be applied with higher accuracy according to the phase (rotation position) of the disk member.

  In the third to ninth embodiments, the case where the number of weight members 3400 to 8400 attached to the guide portions 3350 to 5350 or accommodated in the passages of the box bodies 8350 and 9350 is one has been described. The weight members 3400 to 8400 may be mounted or stored at the same time. By effectively using the space in the extending direction (sliding or rolling direction) of the guide portions 3350 to 5350 and the passage (that is, mounting or storing two or more in parallel along the extending direction) By doing so, it is possible to further secure the weight while reducing the size of the sorting apparatus.

  Although the case where the weight members 3400 to 7400 are configured as an open system has been described in the third to seventh embodiments, the weight members 3400 to 7400 may be configured as a closed system. In that case, the guide portions 3350 to 5350 may be separated from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the case has been described in which the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material). However, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L are made of a nonmagnetic material such as a resin material. Also good. In this case, magnets may be disposed on the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R in the direction of the magnetic poles that can be magnetically attached to the magnet 1380.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are shaped so that the center of gravity is located in the center in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. The case where the shape is a flat plate shape having a constant thickness dimension) has been described, but it is preferable that the center of gravity is decentered toward the tip side from the center in the length direction from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip. This is because the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the support plate members 10300 and 11300 accompanying the displacement of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R can be increased.

  As a method of decentering the center of gravity toward the distal end side, a method of increasing the thickness or / and width dimension of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R toward the distal end side, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L, and Examples thereof include a method of attaching an aluminum sheet or a lead sheet to the front end side of the right weight members 10360R and 11360R or fastening a metal screw.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine having a game area, in which a game ball flows down the game area, receives the game ball flowing down and operates with the weight of the received game ball to move the game ball to a first position and a second position. A gaming machine 1 including a sorting member that alternately distributes to a position.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game machine 1 includes a sorting member that receives a game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the position to the target position, it is possible to guide the game balls equally to different target positions in the game area.

  In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 1, the first start port and the second start port, each of which determines whether or not the game is successful by entering the ball, and the game balls distributed to the first position by the sorting member are guided to the first start port A gaming machine (2), comprising: a first guiding unit that performs the second guiding unit that guides the game balls distributed to the second position by the sorting member to the second starting port.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1, the first ball that guides the gaming balls alternately distributed to the first position and the second position by the sorting member to the first start port and the second start port, respectively. Since the guide portion and the second guide portion are provided, the game balls can be guided equally to the first start port and the second start port (different target positions).

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the first special symbol corresponding to the first start port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified and 2. When a game ball enters the starting port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the second special symbol corresponding to the second starting port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified.

  In this case, if a game ball enters the first start opening during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right to dynamically display the first special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is over the upper limit (for example, It is stored as a holding ball until 4). Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start port during dynamic display of the second special symbol, the right to dynamically display the second special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as a holding ball.

  However, it is difficult to uniformly enter the game balls at the first start port and the second start port, and the balls are likely to be biased only at one of the start ports. ) Is difficult to use. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit (the number of stored balls is stored up to the upper limit at both the first start port and the second start port), more than the upper limit number of game balls enter at one start port. Overflow is likely to occur. When an overflow occurs, the winning lottery and dynamic display for the overflowed entry are not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 2, the game balls flowing down the game area can be evenly entered into the first start port and the second start port by the sorting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the upper limit numbers of the holding balls set at the first start port and the second start port, respectively. In other words, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed and the player's disadvantage can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a disk-shaped disk member that is pivotally supported, and a facing wall member that is disposed to face the disk member. The facing wall member is disposed at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a position where the phase is different in the circumferential direction from the entrance, and the game at the first position. A first ball outlet for discharging a ball; and a second ball outlet for discharging the game ball at the second position while being disposed at a position that is different in phase in the circumferential direction from the ball inlet, The disc member receives a game ball that has entered the entrance port of the facing wall member, and the disc member is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, whereby the received game A first receiving portion for discharging the ball to the first position via the first ball outlet and a game ball that has entered the ball inlet of the facing wall member; And a second receiving portion for discharging the received game ball to the second position through the second discharge port by rotating the disk member with the weight of the received game ball. The gaming machine 3 is configured such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance of the facing wall member.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance of the facing wall member and the received game ball is received by the first receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member has a weight of the game ball. When the first receiving portion reaches the first ball outlet of the facing wall member, the game ball is discharged to the first position through the first ball outlet. In this case, since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance wall of the facing wall member, the balls are then entered into the entrance wall of the facing wall member. The received ball is received by the second receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and the second receiving portion reaches the second outlet of the facing wall member. Thus, the game ball is discharged to the second position through the second discharge port. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first position and the second position, and the distribution operation is executed using the weight of the game balls.

  In addition, since the distribution member is formed in a disk shape and can be arranged in a plane, even in a game area where the depth dimension (the interval between the game board and the plate glass) is relatively small, It is easy to secure a space for arranging the sorting members.

  In the gaming machine 3, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a receiving surface that receives a game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member is inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 3, the first receiving part and the second receiving part have a receiving surface that receives the game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member, Since it is inclined downward along the circumferential direction, when a game ball entering from the entrance is received by the receiving surface of the first receiving portion or the receiving surface of the second receiving portion, the game is played along the downward inclination of the receiving surface. The ball can roll along the circumferential direction of the disk member, and the position where the weight of the game ball acts on the disk member can be moved. Thereby, since the change of the gravity center position of the disc member due to the weight of the game ball can be increased, the disc member can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly. .

  In the gaming machine 4, a game is characterized in that the receiving surfaces of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same direction so as to be inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Machine 5.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 4, the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same downward direction along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Therefore, the disc member is rotated by the rotating direction when the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the first receiving portion and the weight of the game ball received by the second receiving portion. The rotation direction when rotating is the same direction. That is, the rotating direction of the disk member can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where a disc member rotates to one direction and another direction, the operation | movement which distributes a game ball to a 1st position and a 2nd position can be performed stably. In addition, when a mechanism for reducing or stopping the rotation speed of the disk member is provided, the number of the mechanisms disposed can be reduced and the structure can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via a one-way clutch, and is allowed to rotate in a direction in which the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined downward. A gaming machine 6 characterized in that the rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch, and the receiving surface of the first receiving part and the receiving surface of the second receiving part are inclined downward. Rotation (that is, rotation in the direction to be rotated by the weight of the game ball) is allowed and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted, so that it is affected by disturbances such as vibration However, it is possible to avoid the disk member from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it should rotate, and as a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of the operation of distributing the game balls to the first position and the second position.

  The one-way clutch is not limited as long as it only allows rotation in one direction and restricts rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch system include a sprag type and a cam type.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet in the facing wall member are inclined and extended toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. A gaming machine 7 to play.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first and second outlets of the facing wall member are inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disk member into the first discharge port or the second discharge port of the facing wall member.

  That is, since the distribution member has a structure in which the disc member is rotated, when the game ball moves from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first outlet or the second outlet, There is a possibility that the game ball may be caught between the receiving part or the second receiving part and the first outlet or the second outlet. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet are inclined toward the advancing direction of the disk member (that is, the game ball is the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). Therefore, the game balls pushed out from the first receiving part or the second receiving part can be smoothly received into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first outlet and the second outlet are different in phase by 180 degrees with respect to the entrance. The gaming machine 8, wherein the plate member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with the first receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is a position where the first and second outlets are 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance. And the disc member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the first receiving portion. The timing received by one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion can be matched with the timing at which the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion discharges the game ball to the first outlet or the second outlet. .

  That is, when one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet port or the second outlet port, the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the inlet port. Therefore, when the game ball received in one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet, or after discharging, the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part Thus, the next game ball can be received and the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is being transported toward the first outlet or the second outlet (that is, a circle) It is not necessary to receive the next game ball (with the plate member being rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first and second outlets are disposed. A gaming machine 9 which is arranged at the lowermost position.

  According to the gaming machine 9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first outlet Since the mouth and the second ball outlet are disposed at the lowermost position, the game ball can be discharged downward from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. That is, when the ball is discharged, the game ball's own weight acts in a direction to enter the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, so that the game ball is hardly bitten and can be discharged reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet have the same phase, and the first ball outlet with respect to the ball inlet And the second drainage port is disposed at a position where the phase is different by 90 degrees, and the disk member is configured such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are arranged around the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees. A gaming machine 10 that is alternately arranged in four directions.

  According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 3 to 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet arranged at the same phase are 90 degrees out of phase with the ball entrance. Since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are alternately disposed at four positions in the circumferential direction of the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees, the first entrance portion and the second reception portion are placed at the entrance. The timing at which one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the played game ball and the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The timing at which the game ball is discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port can be matched.

  That is, when one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet or the second outlet, the first receiver is disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to the first outlet. Since the other of the part and the second receiving part is in the same phase as the entrance, the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first exiting port or the second exiting port. The next receiving ball can be received by the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to one of the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Alternatively, while the game ball received on one side of the second receiving part is being carried toward the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet (that is, in a state where the disk member is rotated), the next game ball There is no need to receive. Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In addition, since the first outlet and the second outlet are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to the entrance, for example, the first receiver is compared with a configuration in which the phase is changed by 180 degrees. The rotation angle of the disk member required for discharging the game ball received at the head or the second receiving part to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be reduced, and as a result, the disk It is possible to reduce the influence of the inertial force accompanying the rotation of the member. Therefore, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion, and discharge the ball into the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the facing wall member is recessed in a surface facing the disc member, and the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion when the disc member rotates. And a first groove and a second groove that extend along the movement trajectory and communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and are stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the disk member is rotated in a state where a part of a ball is received in the first groove or the second groove.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the first groove and the second groove are recessed in the surface of the facing wall member facing the disk member, and the first groove and the second groove are The disk member extends along the movement trajectory of the first receiving part and the second receiving part when the disk member rotates, so that when the disk member rotates, the first receiving part or the second receiving part 2. A state in which a part of the game ball stored in the receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove can be formed. Therefore, when the disc member rotates, it is possible to form a state in which the disc member is connected to the facing wall member via the game ball, so that the game ball rolls in the first groove or the second groove. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the inertial force from becoming excessive by applying a rotational resistance to the disk member by utilizing the resistance when sliding. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In addition, since the first groove and the second groove communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is transferred to the first groove or the second groove. If the state received in the second groove (that is, the state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part) can be formed, the game ball is moved to the first outlet or the second outlet for the receiving (protrusion). Since the close-up state and the state where it is easy to enter the first or second exit port, the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first or second exit port.

  Further, the first groove and the second groove are communicated with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is the first groove or the second groove. The first receiving part or the second receiving part has reached the first outlet or the second outlet by being in an accepted state (that is, a state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part). In this case, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the edge located on the extension line of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In addition, although the terminal end of the first groove and the second groove communicates with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, the first groove and the second groove do not communicate with the ball inlet, and the start ends of the first groove and the second groove It is preferable that it is separated from the mouth by a predetermined rotation angle. According to this configuration, the initial stage in which the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, where there is no momentum in the rotation, It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotation of the disk member without generating resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotating operation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, so that rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove occurs. By utilizing the resistance caused by the movement, it is possible to suppress the inertial force of the disk member and to optimize the rotation operation.

  In the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet. The resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the first groove and the second groove can be increased as the first receiving part or the second receiving part approaches the first ball discharging port or the second ball discharging port. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized.

  Also, an amount that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove (that is, an amount protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). The game ball can be moved in the direction in which it is accepted (protruded) by gradually increasing the game ball, so that the game ball has an inertial force in the direction of entering the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Can do. As a result, the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be easily entered, and the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In the gaming machine 12, the first groove and the second groove have a maximum recessed depth greater than ½ of the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 12, the maximum recess depth of the first groove and the second groove is set to be larger than ½ of the diameter of the game ball. Since the portion received in the second groove (that is, the portion protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion) is made larger, the game ball can be brought closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, so that the game A state in which the ball can easily enter the first outlet or the second outlet can be formed, and the gaming ball can be more reliably discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at positions of opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. The gaming machine 14 is arranged closer to the disk member than the bottom surface of the two grooves.

  According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at the positions of the opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. Since the first groove and the second groove are disposed closer to the disc member than the bottom surfaces of the first groove and the second groove, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part is the first groove or the second groove. When the first receiving part or the second receiving part reaches the first outlet or the second outlet, the game ball is received by the player (that is, protruding from the first receiver or the second receiver). Can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the side facing the terminal end of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first groove or the second groove. When the disc member is pivoted in a state of being received, the push portion is provided so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotational direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 15 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine 15, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first. When the disk member is rotated in a state of being received in the first groove or the second groove, the pushing portion is positioned so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotation direction of the disk member. Since the pushing portion abuts the game ball that rolls or slides in the first groove or the second groove from the rear in the rotational direction of the disk member, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball is reduced. As a result, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed. Further, when the game ball is discharged to the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, the pushing portion comes into contact with the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disk member, so that the game ball is moved to the first ball discharge port or It can be pushed into the second outlet. Thereby, it is possible to reliably perform the reception of the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and the exit to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member is a disk-side magnet disposed as the magnet disposed on the disk member, and the facing wall member in a direction of a magnetic pole attracting the disk-side magnet. The disk-side magnet and the facing-side magnet are arranged such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disk member are formed of the facing wall member. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position that attracts each other at a rotational position of the disk member that is closer to the first and second outlet holes of the facing wall member than the inlet hole. 16.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles attracting the disc member and the facing wall member, respectively. When the disk member rotates, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member by using the magnetic force (attracting force) of the disk side magnet and the facing magnet. It can suppress that inertia force becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disc member have a first outlet port and a second outlet port of the facing wall member rather than the entrance port of the facing wall member. Since the disk members on the side closer to the position of the disk member are disposed at positions where they are attracted to each other, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force can be appropriately applied to the disk member. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. The rotation of the disk member can be smoothly and promptly advanced without generating. On the other hand, when the rotation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases. However, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed using magnetic force. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member includes a facing magnet disposed on the facing wall member and configured as a magnet, and the facing magnet is a first receiving portion of the disk member. Or the position corresponding to the movement locus | trajectory which the game ball accommodated in the 2nd receiving part moves with rotation operation | movement of the said disk member, Comprising: The 1st ball outlet and the 1 2. A gaming machine 17 which is disposed on the side close to the ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the facing side magnet is a game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the disk member. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the movement trajectory that moves with the rotation operation, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet (the force that attracts the game ball) is used to A rotation resistance can be made to act on a plate member, and it can control that inertia force of a disk member becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In addition, since the facing magnet is disposed closer to the first outlet and the second outlet than the entrance of the facing wall member, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force is appropriately applied to the disk member. Can do. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotating operation of the disk member without generating (a force to attract the game ball). On the other hand, at the stage where the rotational movement of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, and the inertia of the disk member is utilized by utilizing the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball). Force can be suppressed. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 17, the game ball can be used as a target on which the magnetic force by the facing magnet is applied, so there is no need to arrange a magnet on the disc member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 16 or 17, the facing magnet is disposed at a position spaced apart from the disk side magnet or the game ball by a predetermined distance in the radial direction of the disk member, and around the disk member. A gaming machine 18, wherein a plurality of gaming machines 18 are arranged along the direction.

  According to the gaming machine 18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 16 or 17, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of a plurality of facing magnets arranged along the circumferential direction is utilized. Rotational resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member. That is, when a rotational resistance is suddenly applied to the disk member, the brake member is suddenly braked and the rotational operation of the disk member becomes unstable. Therefore, the first receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance port or The reception by the second receiving part and the discharge of the game ball to the first discharge port or the second discharge port are inhibited. In contrast, according to the gaming machine 18, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member can be smoothly decelerated or stopped, and the rotating operation of the disk member can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In the gaming machine 18, the closer the plurality of facing magnets to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer to the disc member radial direction from the disk side magnet or the game ball. The gaming machine 19 is characterized in that the amount of separation is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 18, the closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer the plurality of facing magnets are from the disc side magnet or game ball to the circle. Since the amount of separation of the plate member in the radial direction is reduced, the effect of the magnetic force by the facing magnet is increased as the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion approaches the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can do. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 19, the sorting member includes a shaft portion that is pivotally supported by the facing wall member, and extends from the shaft portion and protrudes into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. And a braking member having a projecting piece and a facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the projecting piece and arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, It is pushed up as the projecting piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball which is drained from the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the member and passes through the first or second outlet of the facing wall member. The gaming machine 20 is characterized in that the facing piece of the braking member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 20, the braking member has a protruding piece extending from the shaft portion pivotally supported by the facing wall member protruding into the first outlet or the second outlet, and the protruding piece. A game ball that is disposed facing the outer peripheral surface of the disc member and facing away from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disc member, the facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the disc member When the ball passes through the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port of the facing wall member, the game ball pushes down the protruding piece of the brake member, and the brake member is rotated about the shaft portion, whereby the brake member Since the facing piece is pushed up, the pushed-up facing piece of the braking member can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the braking member is operated using a game ball passing through the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, and the operation of bringing the facing piece of the brake member into contact with the disk member can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Therefore, power and control for such operations can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 20, the facing wall member includes a storage portion that is a recessed space recessed in a surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the braking member is operable in the recessed space of the storage portion. A gaming machine 21 that is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 21, the storage portion that operably stores the braking member is recessed in the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. It can be blocked by the outer peripheral surface. That is, the braking member stored in the storage unit can be operatively held between the recessed space of the storage unit and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, a member that holds the braking member (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as a disk member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for holding the brake member. You can plan.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. 22.

  According to the gaming machine 22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, the frictional force between the disk member and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member can be secured, and the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be easily exhibited. In addition, since the elastic member is composed of a rubber-like elastic body, when the elastic member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member, the braking member, and the like are reduced. Since it can absorb by elastic deformation, the effect | action which decelerates or stops a disk member can be exhibited stably. Furthermore, for example, a concave-convex shape is formed as compared with a structure in which the disc member is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member. Since it is not necessary, the shape of the part can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member is characterized in that the facing piece is heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine 23, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member has a facing piece heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity position is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion. When the protruding piece is pushed down and the facing piece is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when rotated in one direction around the shaft), the weight of the braking member (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft) Using this, the brake member can be rotated in the other direction and returned to the initial position. Therefore, there is no need to provide an urging member for applying an urging force for returning to the initial position, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine 24 according to any one of the gaming machines 20 to 23, wherein the facing piece of the braking member is formed to be elastically deformable in a direction approaching or separating from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 24, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines 20 to 23, the facing piece of the braking member is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances such as the disc member and the braking member can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece. The action of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be stably exhibited. Similarly, the variation of the position where the passing game ball pushes down the protruding piece and the passing direction can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece, so that the game ball is prevented from being bounced back and reliably. Can be passed. Further, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, the contact force between them (that is, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disk member) is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the rotating operation of the disk member.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. .

  According to the gaming machine 25, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball discharged to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet from being inhibited by the protruding piece, and to smoothly push down the protruding piece to the passing game ball. .

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receptacle that receive the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. And a main body that is pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, a guide portion disposed on the main body portion, and guided by the guide portion to move. And when the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body, the first receiving portion is more than the second receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates to the first angular position that is below, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the game ball received from the entrance is received. The second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game can be performed, and the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion. When the player receives the game ball, the game received by the second receiving portion is caused by the weight of the game ball and the main body portion rotating to a second angular position where the second receiving portion is below the first receiving portion. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the ball can be discharged to the second position and the game ball entered from the entrance can be received. At the first angular position, the guide portion is the first The moving body is moved downward to the receiving portion side and moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward to the second receiving portion side and the moving body is moved. Is moved to the second receiving portion side.

  According to the gaming machine 26, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 26 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the part, for example, after being rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body part to be maintained at the second angular position may return to the first angular position. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 26, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that moves while being guided by the guide unit, the guide unit is the first receiving unit at the first angular position. The moving body is moved downward toward the first receiving portion and moved toward the first receiving portion. At the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion and the moving body is moved toward the second receiving portion. Since it is moved, it is possible to maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first In the case where the two receiving portions are positioned below), the guide body is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion, so that the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main body portion is rotated to the first angular position, the moving body moves toward the first receiving portion side. The main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted. A gaming machine 27 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a guide portion. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the moving body according to the rotation direction of the main body can be achieved with a simple structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost, to enable stable operation, and to improve the reliability.

  In the gaming machine 27, the moving body is a ringed end material made of an elastic material.

  According to the gaming machine 28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 27, the moving body is formed by forming a ringed end material made of an elastic material, so that the work of mounting the moving body on the guide portion is facilitated. As a result, the number of assembly steps can be reduced. That is, when the moving body is mounted on the guide portion, a part of the moving body can be opened by elastic deformation, and the rod-shaped guide portion can be inserted into the annular moving body through the opening.

  The annular shape does not need to be circular, and may be a polygonal shape or an elliptical shape as long as a rod-like moving body can be inserted into the inner periphery thereof. Further, the moving body may be a material wound around, a material cut out from the material, or a material punched from the material.

  The gaming machine 29 according to the gaming machine 29, wherein the moving body is wound around the end material and the ends are overlapped with each other.

  According to the gaming machine 29, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 28, the end portions of the moving body are overlapped with each other, and accordingly, the amount of elastic deformation necessary to open a part of the moving body is large. Become. Therefore, it can suppress that the mobile body with which the guide part was mounted | worn falls off. In addition, since the moving body is formed by winding a material, the manufacturing can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine 30, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section, so that the contact area between the two is reduced and the sliding resistance is reduced. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the guide portion is tilted downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body can be reliably moved along the downward tilt without stopping in the middle, and the movement of the mobile body (Changing the center of gravity position) can be performed quickly. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a passage shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a spherical shape that rolls on the guide portion or A gaming machine 31 that is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine 31, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in the shape of a passage extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the guide portion is rotated. Since the moving body is formed in a moving spherical or cylindrical shape, when the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body is reliably and quickly moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion. Can be moved to.

  For example, in a structure where the moving body slides on the guide part, the sliding resistance is large, so the moving body that moves along the descending slope of the guide part may stop halfway, and the moving speed is slow, The movement of the body (change in the position of the center of gravity) may not be in time. On the other hand, if the moving body is formed in a spherical or cylindrical shape and rolls on the guide portion as in the gaming machine 31, the moving body can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end and moved. It is possible to quickly move the body (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 27, the guide portion includes a box body that is open on one surface side, and a lid body that is attached to the one surface side of the box body, and an internal space formed between the box body and the lid body. A game machine 32, wherein the moving body is accommodated in the game machine 32.

  According to the gaming machine 32, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 27, the guide unit includes a box body that is open on one side and a lid that is attached to the one side of the box body. Since the moving body is housed in the internal space formed between the lids, it is possible to facilitate the work of holding the moving body in the guide portion so that it can be guided, and to reduce the assembly man-hours.

  In the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material, and the fastening screw is fastened. A gaming machine 33, wherein a portion to be fastened is formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 33, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material. The fastened portions to which the fastening screws are fastened are formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, respectively. The fastening screw and the part to be fastened can be positioned at a part that becomes a downwardly inclined end when the guide part is downwardly inclined with the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to reinforce the portion that becomes the descending inclined end and to suppress the damage due to the collision of the moving body. Moreover, since the structure for fastening and fixing the box and the lid can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the moving body collides (the portion that becomes the descending inclined end), a member for reinforcement is provided separately. The product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion includes a recess portion formed by recessing one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion downward. Characteristic gaming machine 34.

  According to the gaming machine 34, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion has a lower end on one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Since the hollow portion is formed, the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body portion, and when the moving body moves to one end side or the other end side along the downward inclination, the moving body Can be prevented from bouncing back to the rising slope side.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion is curved in an arc shape so that a central portion is below the one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. A gaming machine 35 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine 35, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion has a lower central portion than one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Therefore, in the state where the guide portion is inclined downward in accordance with the rotation operation of the main body portion, the gradient on the upward inclination side can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to reliably and promptly move the moving body that has been positioned on the ascending slope side of the guide portion as the main body portion rotates. In particular, in the configuration in which the annular moving body slides on the rod-shaped guide portion, the frictional resistance is large, so there is a possibility that the movement of the moving body positioned on the rising slope side may not be started. On the other hand, the gaming machine 35 is particularly effective.

  The gaming machine 36 according to any one of the gaming machines 26 to 35, wherein the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material, and the moving body is made of a metal material.

  According to the gaming machine 36, in any of the gaming machines 26 to 35, since the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material and the moving body is made of a metal material, the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body Change can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion, and a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion. A game that has a main body that is pivotally supported around the center and a center of gravity position moving means that moves the position of the center of gravity as the main body rotates. When the ball is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the main body portion rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving portion is lower than the second receiving portion by the weight of the game ball. The game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball received from the entrance can be received. When the game ball that has entered the mouth is received by the second receiving portion of the main body, the second receiving portion is weighted by the game ball. When the main body rotates to a second angular position below the first receiving part, the game ball received by the second receiving part is discharged to the second position, and the ball enters from the entrance. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received, and the center-of-gravity position moving means is pivotably suspended on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, respectively. A pair of hanging bodies, proximity means for bringing the hanging body located on the upper side close to the body section when the body is rotated to the first angular position or the second angular position, and a position on the upper side A game machine 37, comprising: release means for releasing the approach to the main body by the approach means to the suspended body and hanging the body.

  According to the gaming machine 37, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 37 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the unit, when the game unit is rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body unit to be maintained at the second angular position is flipped up by the repulsive force during the ball discharging operation of the game ball. In some cases, the first angular position may be reversed. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 37, a pair of suspended bodies that are pivotably suspended respectively on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, and the first angular position or the second angular position. When the main body is rotated, the proximity means for bringing the suspended body located on the upper side closer to the main body and the proximity means for the hanging body located on the upper side are released from the proximity to the main body and suspended. The center-of-gravity position moving means having the releasing means to be moved is provided, so that the center-of-gravity position can be moved in accordance with the rotation of the main body, and thereby the main body is supposed to be in a posture (first angular position or second angular position). ) Can be maintained.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first 2 position is located below), the suspended body located on the upper side (first receiving part side) is brought close to the main body part, and the suspended body located on the lower side (second receiving part side). Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main ball portion is rotated to the first angular position, the drooping located on the upper side (first receiving portion side). While the body is brought close to the main body, and the hanging body located on the lower side (second receiving portion side) is suspended, the main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member is disposed on the hanging body in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the main body side magnet disposed as the magnet and disposed on the main body portion between the pair of hanging bodies. A suspension-side magnet that is disposed and configured as a magnet, and the proximity means magnetizes the suspension-side magnet to the body-side magnet so that the suspension body positioned on the upper side is attached to the body A gaming machine 38 characterized in that the game machine 38 is maintained in a state of being close to the portion.

  According to the gaming machine 38, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet to maintain the drooping body located on the upper side close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, and the reliability of the proximity and the releasing operation thereof can be improved. Improvements can be made.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member includes a main body side magnet arranged as a magnet between the pair of hanging bodies and configured as a magnet, and the pair of hanging bodies are made of a magnetic material, The gaming machine 39, wherein the proximity means maintains the suspended body positioned on the upper side close to the body portion by magnetizing the suspended body to the body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 39, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the hanging body to maintain the hanging body located on the upper side in a state close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified and the reliability of the proximity and its release operation can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained close to each other. Can be achieved.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to arrange | position a magnet only to a main-body part because a pair of drooping body is comprised from a magnetic material. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which magnets are provided on each of the main body and the hanging body, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced by the amount that the magnet disposed on the hanging body can be eliminated. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the hanging body is made of a magnetic material, its weight can be increased, and accordingly, to the lower side of the center of gravity position due to the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)). The amount of movement can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 38 or 39, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body portion, and a proximity protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body portion. The drooping body includes an extending piece that extends from the drooping body and that can be locked to the proximity protrusion when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. The means is that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the body portion is locked to the proximity protrusion, so that the hanging body is brought close to the body portion, A gaming machine 40, wherein a drooping body composed of the drooping side magnet or the magnetic material is magnetically attached to a main body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 40, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 38 or 39, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and a proximity that protrudes from the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the proximity projection when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. Since the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the protrusion for proximity, the hanging body is brought close to the main body portion, and the main body side magnet A drooping body composed of a drooping side magnet or a magnetic material can be magnetized. Thereby, the drooping body located on the upper side can be reliably brought close to the main body. In addition, the hanging body can be brought close to the main body by locking the extending piece to the proximity protrusion, that is, assisting the magnetic attachment of the hanging magnet or the hanging body to the main body side magnet. Since the magnetic force of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet can be weakened, the cost of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and when the drooping body is located on the lower side, the proximity state can be released. It can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body, a release protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body, And the hanging body includes an extending piece that extends from the hanging body and that can be locked to the release protrusion when positioned on the lower side as the main body rotates. The proximity means is configured such that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side as the body portion is rotated is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the body portion. The gaming machine 41 is characterized in that the proximity of the drooping body to the main body by the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping body or a drooping body made of a magnetic material is released.

  According to the gaming machine 41, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the releasing projection when positioned downward as the main body rotates. Since the extension piece is provided, the extension piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the main body portion, and the main body The magnetic attachment of the side magnet and the drooping side magnet (proximity of the drooping body to the main body) can be released. Thereby, the hanging body located on the lower side can be suspended and the center of gravity as a whole can be moved reliably.

  One extended piece serves as both the extended piece in the gaming machine 40 and the extended piece in the gaming machine 41 (that is, it can be locked to both the proximity protrusion and the release protrusion). It is preferable to configure as described above. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the extending piece for locking to the protruding portion for proximity and the extending piece for locking to the hanging portion for releasing the protrusion on the hanging body. Can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a rotation shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to a tip end thereof, so that the length of the main body portion is from the rotation shaft. The at least one main body side magnet that is larger than the length to the center and is disposed in the main body portion maintains one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies close to the main body portion. A gaming machine 42 that can be used as a magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 42, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip end, Since it is made larger than the length dimension from the rotation axis to the center of the main body, at least one main body side magnet disposed in the main body is in a state where one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies are close to the main body. It can also be used as a magnet for maintaining the above. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. In addition, in this way, by making the length of the hanging body larger than the length from the pivot shaft to the center of the main body, the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) ), The amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position can be increased, and as a result, the main body can be easily maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  In any one of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are arranged such that the center of gravity is located on the tip side from the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip. A gaming machine 43 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 43, in any of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are more on the distal side than the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft supported pivotally to the main body portion to the distal end. Since the center of gravity position is arranged, the amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position associated with the displacement of the drooping body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) can be increased. The first angle position or the second angle position) can be easily maintained.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Any one of the gaming machines 1 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start opening provided in the game area, lottery of the game is lottery, and a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies the lottery result is executed on the display device Is done.
In this configuration, a plurality of start openings are provided, and depending on the entry of the game balls into the respective start openings, whether or not the game is individually drawn by lottery, and dynamically displaying special symbols corresponding to the respective start openings, There are known ones that notify the lottery result. For example, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221), when a game ball enters the first start opening, dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, and the game ball enters the second start opening. When the ball is played, a gaming machine in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed is disclosed.
Thus, the player may use different positions in the game area as target positions (in the above example, the first start port and the second start port). However, it is difficult to guide the game balls equally (for example, to enter the first start port and the second start port) with respect to different target positions in the game area. For example, there is a problem in that the guidance is biased toward the first start port only).
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of guiding a game ball evenly to different target positions in a game area.
<Means>
The gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a gaming area, in which a gaming ball flows down, receives the flowing gaming ball, operates with the weight of the received gaming ball, and A distribution member that alternately distributes the game balls to the first position and the second position is provided, and the distribution members enter a game entrance into which the game balls that flow down the game area enter, A main body portion having a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion for receiving a ball that has been balled and pivotally supported about the space between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and disposed in the main body portion And a moving body guided and moved by the guide unit. When the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving unit of the main body unit, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part. And the second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball received at the first receiving portion can be discharged to the first position and the game ball received from the entrance can be received. When the game ball that has entered the entry ball port is received by the second receiving portion of the main body, the second receiving portion is below the first receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball to the second angular position. When the main body rotates, the game ball received by the second receiving portion is discharged to the second position, and at the position where the game ball received from the entrance is received. The guide portion is inclined downward toward the first receiving portion at the first angular position, and the moving body is moved toward the first receiving portion, and at the second angular position, The guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion, and the movable body is moved toward the second receiving portion.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, wherein the guide part is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving part and the second receiving part, The moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the moving body is formed by annularly forming an end material made of an elastic material.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in which the moving body is wound around the end material and the ends are overlapped.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the game machine includes a sorting member that receives a game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the first position and the second position as the target positions, the game balls can be equally guided to different target positions in the game area.
In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.
In addition, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that is guided and moved by the guide unit are provided, and at the first angular position, the guide unit is inclined downward toward the first receiving unit side to move the moving body. Is moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion side, and the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. It is possible to maintain the main body portion in a posture (first angular position or second angular position) that should be originally used by utilizing the change in the gravity center position accompanying the.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the guide part is a rod-like shape extending along the direction connecting the first receiving part and the second receiving part. Since the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted, a mechanism for moving the moving body according to the rotation direction of the main body portion can be achieved with a simple structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost, to enable stable operation, and to improve the reliability.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the moving body is formed by annularly forming an end material made of an elastic material. As a result, it is possible to reduce the assembly man-hours. That is, when the moving body is mounted on the guide portion, a part of the moving body can be opened by elastic deformation, and the rod-shaped guide portion can be inserted into the annular moving body through the opening.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, since the moving body is overlapped with each other, a part of the moving body is opened accordingly. The amount of elastic deformation necessary to make it increase. Therefore, it can suppress that the mobile body with which the guide part was mounted | worn falls off. In addition, since the moving body is formed by winding a material, the manufacturing can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63a First start port 63b Second start port 1000, 3000, 10000 Sorting device (sorting member)
1110L Left guide passage (first guide or second guide)
1110R Right guidance path (second guidance part or first guidance part)
1220 facing wall member 1221 entrance 1222L left exit (first exit or second exit)
1222R Right exit port (second exit port or first exit port)
1300 Disc member 1310L Left receiving part (first receiving part or second receiving part)
1310R Right receiving part (second receiving part or first receiving part)
1311 Bottom (receiving surface)
1320 Pushing plate (pushing part)
1223L Left groove (first groove or second groove)
1223R right groove (second groove or first groove)
1226 Face-to-face magnet 1330 One-way clutch 3120L Left communication hole (first guide part or part of second guide part)
3120R right communication hole (second guide or part of first guide)
3220a, 3220b, 3220c Wall member (first guide part or part of second guide part)
3300, 4300, 5300, 8300, 9300, 10300, 11300 Support plate member (main body)
2230 Storage part 2240 Braking member 2241 Shaft part 2242 Protruding piece 2243 Face piece 2244 Elastic member 3330 Central plate (a part of the first receiving part or the second receiving part)
3340L Left receiving plate (part of first receiving portion or second receiving portion)
3340R Right receiving plate (second receiving part or part of first receiving part)
3350, 4350, 5350 Guide part 5350a, 9350a Depression part 3400, 6400, 7400, 8400 Weight member (moving body)
8350, 9350 Box (part of the guide)
8351 Fastened hole (part of the fastened part)
8360 Lid (part of guide)
8370 Fastening screw 10100 Substrate member 10141 Upper projection (proximity projection, part of proximity means)
10142 Lower protrusion (release protrusion, part of release means)
10360L, 11360L Left weight member (hanging body, part of proximity means, part of gravity center position moving means)
10360R, 11360R Right weight member (hanging body, part of proximity means, part of center of gravity position moving means)
10370L Left locking piece (extension piece, proximity means and part of release means)
10370R Right locking piece (extension piece, part of proximity means and release means)
10380 Magnet (main body side magnet, part of proximity means)

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine that has a gaming area and in which gaming balls flow down,
A distribution member that receives the flowing game balls and operates with the weight of the received game balls and alternately distributes the game balls to the first position and the second position,
The sorting member is
A entrance for a game ball flowing down the game area;
A main body having a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion for receiving a game ball that has entered the entrance, and pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion;
A guide part disposed in the main body part, and a moving body that is guided and moved by the guide part,
When the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body, the first receiving portion is below the second receiving portion by the weight of the game ball to the first angular position. When the main body portion rotates, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and at the second position, the game ball received from the entrance port can be received. When the game ball that has been placed in the entrance and is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the second receiving portion is below the first receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates to the second angular position, it is possible to drain the game ball received by the second receiving portion to the second position and receive the game ball that has entered from the entrance. The first receiving part is arranged at a position,
At the first angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the first receiving portion, and the movable body is moved toward the first receiving portion. At the second angular position, the guide portion is 2. A gaming machine, wherein the movable body is moved downward toward the second receiving portion and moved toward the second receiving portion.   The guide part is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving part and the second receiving part, and the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide part is inserted. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the moving body is a ring-shaped end material made of an elastic material.   The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the moving body has the end material wound around and the end portions are overlapped with each other.

Images